Solicitation Document - Invitation for Bid No. 2014-002 - City of ...

City of Gaithersburg 

31 South Summit Avenue 

Gaithersburg, Maryland 20877 

INVITATION FOR BID 

No. 

2014-002 

WATER PARK PHASE-II RENOVATION 

PROJECT 

Solicitation Issued: 

August 30, 2013 

Bid Submissions Due: 

October 9, 2013 

Time: 

2:00 PM 

Submissions Received By: 

Sunil Prithviraj, Capital Projects Manager 

Department of Public Works 

800 Rabbitt Road 


MAYOR 

Sidney A. Katz 

COUNCIL MEMBERS 

Jud Ashman 

Cathy Drzyzgula 

Henry Marraffa, Jr. 

Michael Sesma 

Ryan Spiegel 

CITY MANAGER 

Tony Tomasello

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Section I – Notice to Bidders ..................................................................................................................... 1 

Section II – Introduction and Solicitation Schedule ................................................................................ 2 

1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 2 

2. Solicitation Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 2 

3. Solicitation Questions ..................................................................................................................... 2 

a. Submission of Questions ................................................................................................... 2 

b. Answers to Questions ....................................................................................................... 3 

Section III – Bid Submission Instructions ................................................................................................ 4 

1. Bid Submissions ............................................................................................................................. 4 

2. Bid Contents (“The Bid”) ................................................................................................................. 4 

Section IV – Scope of Work........................................................................................................................ 5 

1. Ticket Office Renovations .............................................................................................................. 5 

2. Multipurpose Room Renovations ................................................................................................... 5 

3. Breezeway ...................................................................................................................................... 6 

4. Accessibility Upgrades (ADA) ........................................................................................................ 6 

5. Snack Bar ....................................................................................................................................... 7 

6. Children’s Pool Toilet...................................................................................................................... 7 

7. Gable Archways ............................................................................................................................. 7 

Section V – Bidder Conditions and Qualifications .................................................................................. 8 

1. Solicitation Documents (Invitation for Bid) ..................................................................................... 8 

2. Bidder Qualifications....................................................................................................................... 8 

3. Contract, Bond and Form Information ............................................................................................ 8 

4. Addendums and Amendments ....................................................................................................... 9 

5. The Bid ........................................................................................................................................... 9 

6. Work Hours and Use of Premises .................................................................................................. 9 

7. Change Orders, Overhead and Profit........................................................................................... 10 

8. Construction Coordination ............................................................................................................ 10 

9. Field Verification and Identification ............................................................................................... 10 

10. Materials ....................................................................................................................................... 11 

11. Construction Inspections .............................................................................................................. 11 

12. Risk of Loss .................................................................................................................................. 11 

13. Shop and As-Built Drawings ......................................................................................................... 11 

14. Warranties .................................................................................................................................... 11 

15. Project Closeout ........................................................................................................................... 11 

16. Project Schedule .......................................................................................................................... 11 

Section VI – General Terms and Conditions .......................................................................................... 12 

1. City’s Rights .................................................................................................................................. 12

2. Interest in More than One Bid and Collusion ............................................................................... 12 

3. Accurate Information .................................................................................................................... 12 

4. Addendums and Amendments ..................................................................................................... 12 

5. Assignment of Contract ................................................................................................................ 12 

6. Contract Award ............................................................................................................................. 12 

7. Acceptance and Rejection of Bid Submissions ............................................................................ 13 

8. Bid Submissions ........................................................................................................................... 13 

9. Late Bid Submissions ................................................................................................................... 13 

10. Modified and Alternate Bid Submissions ...................................................................................... 13 

11. Errors in Bid Submissions ............................................................................................................ 13 

12. Errors in Solicitation Documents .................................................................................................. 13 

13. Invoicing ....................................................................................................................................... 14 

14. Payment Terms ............................................................................................................................ 14 

15. Governing Law ............................................................................................................................. 14 

16. Conflict of Interest......................................................................................................................... 14 

17. Contract Award Protest ................................................................................................................ 14 

18. Solicitation Protest ........................................................................................................................ 15 

19. Additional Goods or Services ....................................................................................................... 15 

20. Changes ....................................................................................................................................... 15 

21. Cancellation .................................................................................................................................. 15 

22. Termination ................................................................................................................................... 15 

a. Termination for Cause ..................................................................................................... 15 

b. Termination for Convenience .......................................................................................... 16 

c. Termination for Non-Appropriation of Funds ................................................................... 16 

23. Confidentiality ............................................................................................................................... 16 

24. Dissemination of Data .................................................................................................................. 16 

25. Inspection of Records ................................................................................................................... 16 

26. Ownership .................................................................................................................................... 16 

27. Retention of Records .................................................................................................................... 17 

28. Indemnification ............................................................................................................................. 17 

29. Inconsistent Provisions ................................................................................................................. 17 

30. Insurance ...................................................................................................................................... 17 

31. Immigration Reform and Control Act ............................................................................................ 17 

32. Non-Discrimination Requirements ................................................................................................ 18 

33. Independent Contractor Status/Personnel ................................................................................... 18 

34. Use of Broker ................................................................................................................................ 19 

35. Accounting System and Audit ...................................................................................................... 19 

36. Patents ......................................................................................................................................... 19 

Section VII – Supplemental Terms and Conditions ............................................................................... 20

1. Environmental Concerns and Protection ...................................................................................... 20 

2. City Representatives .................................................................................................................... 20 

3. Contractor’s Assumption of Risk .................................................................................................. 20 

4. No Waiver by the City ................................................................................................................... 20 

5. Contractor’s Duties and Responsibilities ...................................................................................... 20 

a. Duties of the Contractor .................................................................................................. 20 

b. Supervision and Construction Procedures ...................................................................... 21 

c. Review of Contract Documents ....................................................................................... 21 

d. Qualifications of the Contractor ....................................................................................... 21 

e. Responsibility for Those Performing the Work ................................................................ 21 

f. Permits and Licenses ...................................................................................................... 21 

g. Compliance with Laws ..................................................................................................... 22 

h. Drawings and Specifications at the Site .......................................................................... 22 

i. Shop Drawings and Submittals ....................................................................................... 22 

j. Use of Site ....................................................................................................................... 22 

k. Subcontractors ................................................................................................................ 22 

l. Payments to Subcontractors ........................................................................................... 23 

m. Cutting, Patching and Restoration of Work ..................................................................... 23 

6. Disputed Work .............................................................................................................................. 23 

Section VIII - Attachments ........................................................................................................................ 24

SECTION I – NOTICE TO BIDDERS 

This is an invitation for bids only, it is not a contract (hereinafter referred to as “Solicitation”). 

The City of Gaithersburg, (hereinafter referred to as the “City”), shall assume no obligation to pay 

or reimburse any person or firm, (hereinafter referred to as the “Bidder”), responding to this 

Solicitation for any costs, fees, or expenses incurred in preparation of a response to this 

Solicitation, or for any meetings or travel costs related to such response. The City is under no 

obligation to any responding party until a contract is executed for the services described herein. 

To enter into a contract with the City, companies must be in compliance with the State of Maryland Code 

of Regulations Title 21, State Procurement Regulations. 

Bidders must supply, with their Bids, their US Treasury Department Employers’ Identification Number 

(Federal ID Number) as such number is shown on their Employer’s Quarterly Federal Tax Return (US 

Treasury Department Form No. 941). This number shall be inserted on the Response to Solicitation 

Submission Certification in the space provided. 

Bidders must be qualified to propose in the State of Maryland in accordance with Sections 16-202 and 

16-203 of the State Finance and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland. 

The City reserves the right to reject any or all Bids in part or in full and to waive any technicalities 

or informalities as best may serve the interests of the City. 

Individuals with a disability who would like to receive this Solicitation in another form should 

contact the City’s Procurement Officer at 301-258-6320. 

Invitation for Bid No. 2014-002 

Water Park Phase-II Renovation Project Page 1 of 24

SECTION II – INTRODUCTION AND SOLICITATION SCHEDULE 

1. Introduction 

The City is seeking sealed bids for commercial construction services for the Water Park at Bohrer 

Park Phase II Renovations project. Work under the contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation, 

(hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”), includes interior and exterior renovations, repairs, and ADA 

upgrades to various sections of the main building at the Water Park at Bohrer Park, located at 512 

South Frederick Avenue, Gaithersburg, Maryland 20877. Such renovations and ADA upgrades 

include but are not limited to: 

• Renovations to a ticketing office; 

• Renovations to a multipurpose room; 

• Renovations to a Breezeway; 

• ADA upgrades to men’s and women’s bathrooms/locker rooms; 

• Renovations to a snack bar; and 

• Renovations to gable archways. 

2. Solicitation Schedule 

The following is the tentative schedule of events for this Solicitation; applicable times are according to 

Eastern Standard Time (EST). The City reserves the right to modify this schedule; any and all 

modifications shall be communicated by addendum or amendment as outlined in Provision four (4), 

Addendums and Amendments, in the General Terms and Conditions, of this Solicitation. 

Event 

Date 

• Solicitation Issued: August 30, 2013 

• * Pre-Bid Meeting: September 18, 2013 at 11:00 a.m. 

Location 

Water Park at Bohrer Park 

512 South Frederick Avenue 


• Bidder Questions Due: September 25, 2013 by 3:00 p.m. 

• City’s Answers to Questions Issued: October 3, 2013 

• ** Bid Submissions Due: October 9, 2013 by 2:00 p.m. 

Submitted To 





* The meeting is not mandatory; however, Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend. 

** Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud on the same date and time. 

3. Solicitation Questions 

a. Submission of Questions 

Questions regarding this Solicitation shall be made in writing and must be received by the 

date and time due as specified hereinabove; questions shall be submitted using one of the 

following methods: 



By Mail 





By Email 

sprithviraj@gaithersburgmd.gov 

b. Answers to Questions 

The City’s answers to Bidder questions will be posted by addendum on the City’s website at 

www.gaithersburgmd.gov/bids on the date specified herein above. 



SECTION III – BID SUBMISSION INSTRUCTIONS 

Bids shall be submitted by the date and time due as provided in the Solicitation Schedule and Questions 

section of this Solicitation. Bids submitted via facsimile or e-mail is strictly prohibited; Bids submitted as 

such shall be rejected without consideration. The City assumes no responsibility for delays or errors in 

delivery; postmarking by the due date shall not substitute for actual receipt. 

Bids submitted not in compliance with any of the provisions herein shall be rejected as nonresponsive. 

1. Bid Submissions 

Bidders shall submit their bids in a sealed envelope clearly labeled as follows: 

• IFB No. 2014-002 

• Water Park Phase II Renovations Project 

2. Bid Contents (“The Bid”) 

Bidders shall submit two (2) complete original bids; both sets must bear original signatures and 

stamps. 

The Bid shall contain the following: 

a. City Forms 

The following completed forms and documents which are attached hereto: 

• Quotation Sheet 

• Amendment Acknowledgement Form 

• Affidavit of Qualification to Bid/Propose Form (Requires Notary) 

• Conflict of Interest Certification Form (Requires Notary) 

• Litigation and Lien Information Form 

• Response to Solicitation Submission Certification Form (Requires Notary) 

• Project Experience Form 

b. Statement of Qualifications 

The statement of qualifications shall include the following: 

• Bidder’s/Company’s profile. 

• Resources available for this project. 

• Provide three (3) example projects demonstrating Bidder’s experience in similar type 

of projects. 

• The supporting documents for minimum of five (5) years commercial construction 

experience. 

• Bidder’s Certificate of Qualification (Business registration), to propose in the State of 

Maryland in accordance with Sections 16-202 and 16-203 of the State Finance and 

Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland. 



SECTION IV – SCOPE OF WORK 

1. Ticket Office Renovations 

The major portion of this work comprises interior renovation at the existing ticket office. The 

proposed renovations will involve but not be limited to the following: 

a. Demolition 

• Remove existing base and wall millwork. 

• Remove ceiling tiles and grid. 

• Remove wall and floor coverings; strip off drywall to furring members. 

• Remove existing windows on north and east walls. 

• Remove portions of existing Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU) in west wall as indicated 

in the drawings to facilitate a larger rough opening for the new window. Provide lintel 

support to span additional 16 inches as shown in the drawings. 

b. Construction 

• Install gypsum wallboard furring at all four walls. Provide rigid board insulation to 

match furring channel depth. 

• Install new carpet and underlayment. 

• Install 8’X4’ (approximate) 3 bay teller window with aluminum frame and 

polycarbonate resin thermoplastic double pane glazing on the north wall. Install 

countersunk deal-tray and speak-through at each end panel as shown in the 

drawings. 

• Install 5’-6”X4’-8” (approximate) horizontal slider pass-through window with aluminum 

frame and polycarbonate resin thermoplastic double pane glazing on east wall. 

Install one countersink deal-tray and speak-through as shown in the drawings. 

• Install approximately 20 linear feet custom millwork with solid surface countertop 

alongside the teller windows on north and east walls. The counter along the east 

wall shall be ADA height. 

• Install custom plastic laminated casework on south wall. The wall casework will be 

open “cubbies” type shelving. The bottom casework will be shallow depth base 

cabinets as shown in the drawings. 

• Install new ceiling grid and acoustical tiles. 

• Relocate existing PA amplifiers and associated controls per the drawings; provide a 

new shelf to support. 

• Extend existing telephone system to serve three handsets in the ticket office. Voice 

circuits shall terminate at exiting BIX blocks. 

• Extend existing data system to serve three workstations in the ticket office. Data 

circuits shall terminate at the existing patch panel located in the Data Room. 

• Provide power outlets under and above new countertops to support various 

electronic equipments. 

• Provide new 2'X4' direct/indirect fluorescent luminaries. 

2. Multipurpose Room Renovations 

a. Demolition 



3. Breezeway 

• Remove existing base and wall cabinets at the north wall. Remove existing hand 

wash sink and cap plumbing outlets, remove existing receptacles below countertop. 

• Remove existing millwork base and wall cabinets at the east wall of first aid area. 

b. Construction 

• Install new custom millwork with solid surface counter. Replace existing power 

receptacles above the countertop with new stainless steel receptacles. Remove 

existing receptacles below countertop. 

• Install new custom millwork with solid surface counter. Replace existing power 

receptacles above and below countertop with new stainless steel receptacles. 

• Replace existing luminaries to provide greater illumination at the breezeway located outside 

the east wall of the ticket office. 

• Install Post-rope Queue Control System outside the north wall of ticket office. The posts shall 

be in fixed position with removable rope section. 

• Add concrete pavement at existing planter as indicated in plans. Protect and preserve the 

remaining planter during construction. 

• Relocate existing bicycle stand. 

4. Accessibility Upgrades (ADA) 

Major portions of the upgrades will be in the existing male and female changing rooms and shower 

areas. Other upgrades will be at the snack bar and the existing toilet at the children’s pool area. 

a. Men’s Shower Area 

• Modify and adjust mounting height for entire lavatory counter and backsplash in changing 

room to comply with ADA. Replace one existing faucet with wrist blade ADA compliant 

faucet. 

• Modify one toilet compartment into ambulatory stall in changing room. This may involve 

slight adjustment to existing partition, replacement of existing door and adding new grab 

bars. 

• Modify a shower and controls to comply with ADA in the existing gang shower. Install 

privacy curtain to the modified shower area. Add fold down shower seat. 

• Modify and shorten existing bench at the location of accessible locker alcove to enable 

ease of access as shown in the drawings. 

• Provide signage outside the rear (east side) doors to indicate the location and route of 

accessible door. 

b. Women’s Shower Area 

• Modify and adjust mounting height for entire lavatory counter and backsplash in changing 

rooms to comply with ADA. Replace one existing faucet with wrist blade ADA compliant 

faucet. 

• Modify one toilet compartment into ambulatory stall in changing room. This may involve 

slight adjustment to existing partition, replacement of existing door and adding new grab 

bars. 



• Add accessible dressing area to the female changing room. This would require 

demolition and addition of CMU partition wall in existing changing areas, addition of grab 

bars, and installation of a new cubicle curtain. 

• Modify the existing single occupant shower to comply with ADA by removing existing 

shower pan and adding new terrazzo shower area. Installing new grab bars, fold down 

shower seat and adjustable accessible shower head and wand. 

• Modify and shorten existing bench at the location of accessible locker alcove to enable 

ease of access as shown in the drawings. 

• Provide signage outside the rear (east side) doors to indicate the location and route of 

accessible door. 

5. Snack Bar 

Lower the sill, indoor counter and associated screen window, as well as the roll-up overhead shutter 

at the side serving window of the snack bar. 

6. Children’s Pool Toilet 

Replace metal door with in kind outward swing door as shown in the drawings. 

7. Gable Archways 

a. Front and Food Court 

• Completely remove Direct Applied Exterior Finishing System (DEFS). 

• Repair or replace rotted plywood sheathing and framing where necessary. 

• Metal roof must be installed per manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

• All repairs shall be done as per the drawings. 

b. Clock Tower 

• Completely remove DEFS system. 

• Repair or replace rotted plywood sheathing and framing where needed. 

• Metal roof must be installed per manufacturer’s instructions. 

• Install City provided clock. 


c. Golf Park Entryway 

• Completely remove DEFS System. 

• Repair or replace rotted plywood sheathing and framing where needed. 

• Install new approved EIFS Class PB System on the walls. 

• Metal roof must be installed per manufacturer’s instructions. 

• Re-install signage lettering. 


Bidders shall refer to Attachment C, Drawings and Specifications, for the complete Work Scope, 

materials and repair procedures. 



SECTION V – BIDDER CONDITIONS AND QUALIFICATIONS 

1. Solicitation Documents (Invitation for Bid) 

a. Bidders are expected to examine all documents, specifications and forms (“Solicitation 

Documents”) carefully. If doubt exists as to the meaning or intent of anything in any of the 

Solicitation Documents, Bidders shall make an inquiry as to such meaning or intent prior to 

submitting their bid. The submission of a bid shall indicate that the Bidder thoroughly 

understands all said Bid Documents. 

b. Each bid shall include a price for each item of the work proposed. Where the attached 

Schedule of Prices Bid Sheet requests a lump sum price, a lump sum price shall be stated. 

Where the Schedule of Prices Bid Sheet requests a unit price, a unit price shall be stated. In 

either event, the City shall not be responsible for any error in the approximate quantities 

stated in the Schedule of Prices Bid Sheet. 

2. Bidder Qualifications 

a. The City may make such investigation, as it deems necessary, to determine the qualifications 

and ability of the Bidder, to furnish the supplies, materials, equipment, labor, and services 

necessary to complete the work within the City’s schedule. The Bidder shall furnish to the 

City all information and data for this purpose as the City may request including the attached 

Project Experience Form. The City reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence 

submitted or investigation fails to satisfy the City, that a Bidder is properly qualified to carry 

out the obligations contemplated in the Contract. Following verification of the Bidder’s 

qualifications and bid, a Contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible 

Bidder. 

b. The City reserves the right to reject any bid if evidenced that a Bidder is not qualified to 

perform under the Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation. 

c. Work must be performed by a firm with a minimum of five (5) years commercial construction 

experience. 

d. An experienced full time supervisor, who has a minimum of three (3) years’ experience in 

commercial construction, shall be assigned to this project. The supervisor shall be present at 

all times during the construction. 

3. Contract, Bond and Form Information 

a. The Contract consists of Contract pages, Solicitation document (Bidder Conditions, General 

Conditions, Plans, Specifications) as Exhibit-A and the Bid (as defined in Bidder instructions 

section) as Exhibit-B. The City expects to award a fixed price contract based on the proposed 

bid for a specific period on present assumptions. 

b. If the Principal is a partnership, the full names of all general partners must be inserted in the 

Contract; which must recite they are the general partners of the partnership. All general 

partners must execute the Contract and affidavit as individuals. 

c. The State of Incorporation of each corporation must be inserted in the Contract and the 

documents must be executed under the corporate seal of said corporations and attested by 

the secretary or other appropriate office. A corporate signature must conform exactly to 

correct chartered name on the corporate seal. If executed by an officer other than the 

president, evidence of authority granted such other officer, must be furnished. 



d. Bid bond is not required for this project, however if the Bidder withdraws a bid, it may become 

basis to reject future bids submitted to the City. The selected Contractor shall provide a 100% 

Performance and Payment Bond prior to the Contract execution. The date of the Payment 

Bond must be consistent with that of the Contract or subsequent thereto. A certified copy of 

the Power of Attorney of the attorney-in-fact executing the Payment Bond, bearing the same 

date as the Payment Bond and certified by a manual signature, must be attached to each 

copy of the Payment Bond. Facsimile signature on the certification will not be accepted. 

e. The Contractor shall administer this project in conformance with all laws, regulations and 

policies of the State of Maryland, Montgomery County, and the City of Gaithersburg. 

4. Addendums and Amendments 

Any Addenda/Amendments issued after the Invitation for Bid and before the opening of bids shall be 

included in the bid. All Addenda/Amendments will be posted on the City’s website. 

5. The Bid 

The bid as defined in the “Bidder Instructions” section shall be returned in its entirety; all of which will 

become part of the Contract. 

6. Work Hours and Use of Premises 

a. Normal Facility Operation Hours 

(1) The facility will be closed to public from mid September to late March. Water Park is 

available for construction Monday-Saturday 7:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. Additional access 

shall be coordinated with the City assigned Project Manager. 

(2) Work shall not be performed other than normal working hours except when such 

timeliness of performance is necessary to safeguard life or property. Deviation from 

normal working hours shall be authorized by the Project Manager. 

(3) Requests for deviation from normal working hours shall be submitted in writing to 

the City’s Project Manager not less than seventy-two (72) hours in advance of the 

proposed work period. 

b. Traffic, Safety and Interruptions 

The Contractor shall provide signs to prevent traffic from interfering with work. The 

Contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions to protect occupants and the facility. 

c. Contractor Use of Premises 

The Contractor shall limit his use of the premises to the work indicated, so as to allow for City 

occupancy and use. 

(1) Confine operations at the site to the areas permitted under the Contract. Portions of 

the site beyond areas on which work is indicated are not to be disturbed. Conform 

to site rules and regulations affecting the work while engaged in project 

construction. 

(2) Keep existing egresses outside the construction zone clear and available to the 

public during normal facility operation hours. Do not use these areas for parking or 

storage of materials. Parking areas and areas for storage of materials shall be 

limited to those areas within the construction zone. 

(3) Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Confine 

storage of materials and locations of storage sheds to the areas within the 

construction zone. If additional storage is necessary, obtain and pay for such 

storage off site. 



7. Change Orders, Overhead and Profit 

The Change Orders must be approved in advance, in writing and that in submitting Change Order 

requests, they must indicate the fixed price, which cannot exceed the indicated percentages for the 

enumerated categories. 

Overhead Profit Commission 

To the Contractor for work performed by its own 

forces. 

To Contractor for work performed by other than its 

own forces. 

To Subcontractor for work performed by its own 

forces. 

To the Subcontractor for work performed by other 

than its own forces. 

10% Plus 5% -- 

-- -- 10% 

10% -- -- 

-- Plus 10% -- 

8. Construction Coordination 

a. The Contractor shall submit a Project Schedule to the City’s Project Manager and get written 

approval, prior to starting the work. 

b. An experienced full time supervisor who has verifiable, responsible and a minimum of three 

(3) years construction experience shall be assigned to this project. The supervisor shall be 

present at all times during the project execution. 

c. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Daily Report to the City’s Project Manager. The 

Daily Report shall include the following: 

• Name of project; 

• Project number; 

• Date of report; 

• Weather conditions; 

• Manpower status on each type of work being performed, by building; 

• Overtime worked and planned; 

• Work progress; 

• Environmental problems and corrections; 

• Other information, such as special events or occurrences, accidents, 

recommendations, suggestions, visitors, major equipment or materials received, 

tests, inspections, equipment start-up and check-out, and occupancy; and 

• The Contractor shall take the necessary action required to specifically alert the City’s 

Project Manager to items which could result in claims. 

9. Field Verification and Identification 

The Contractor shall verify all existing information, conditions and dimensions by field measurement 

within one week of the beginning of construction activity. This shall be done prior to any demolition, 

fabrication of materials or construction. The Contractor shall report any discrepancies or conflicts to 

the structural engineer. In the event that field conditions differ significantly from the Contract 

documents, a revision will be issued by the structural engineer with sketches and/or revised Contract 

documents. 



10. Materials 

The Contractor shall refer to plans and specification for materials, any deviations shall be preapproved 

by the City’s Project Manager. 

11. Construction Inspections 

Contractor shall coordinate all required inspections. The Contractor shall allow inspections at any 

time and honor the inspector’s requests to observe the work. The inspector shall not unduly hinder 

the Contractor’s progress with unreasonable requests or delays. 

12. Risk of Loss 

During performance of the work and until final acceptance thereof, the Contractor shall be under an 

absolute obligation to protect the finished and unfinished work against any damage, loss, or injury. 

The Contractor shall take proper precautions to protect the finished work from loss or damage, 

pending completion and final acceptance of all work included in the Contract. Such precautions shall 

not relieve the Contractor from any and all liability and responsibility for loss or damage to the work 

occurring before final acceptance by the City. Such loss or damage shall be at the risk of and borne 

by the Contractor, whether arising from acts or omissions of the Contractor or others and whether or 

not covered by the Contractor's Builder's Risk Insurance. In the event of any such loss or damage, 

the Contractor shall forthwith repair, replace and make good the work without extension of time. 

Therefore, the Contractor shall take special precautions throughout all its operations to guard against 

fire and shall reduce the amount of flammable materials stored at the site to the minimum amount 

consistent with the proper handling and storing of such materials. 

13. Shop and As-Built Drawings 

The Contractor shall provide Shop Drawings as needed and As-Built Drawings shall be provided as 

part of the project closing documents. 

14. Warranties 

The Contractor shall provide a written warranty for a minimum of one (1) year to cover defects in 

materials and workmanship. Should the materials manufacturer’s warranty exceed one (1) year, the 

later should apply. All warranties shall start from the date of project acceptance. 

15. Project Closeout 

Upon written notification by the Contractor that the work is finally complete, the City will conduct a 

final inspection of the work. When the City determines that the work has been satisfactorily 

completed and the Contract requirements are fully satisfied, including warranty documents, final 

inspections and maintenance manuals, the City will issue a Project Acceptance Letter and process 

the final payment. 

16. Project Schedule 

The Contractor shall schedule the work within fifteen (15) days from the date of Notice to Proceed. 

The Contractor shall complete the work within twelve (12) weeks from the date of project kick-off. 



SECTION VI – GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS 

The Terms and Conditions of this Solicitation document or of the Contract awarded pursuant to this 

Solicitation apply in the event of conflict with the Bidder’s bid submission, and are not subject to change 

by reasons of written or verbal statement by the Bidder unless accepted in writing by the City. 

1. City’s Rights 

The City shall assume no obligation to pay or reimburse any person or firm responding to this 

Solicitation for any costs, fees, or expenses incurred in preparation of a response to this Solicitation, 

or for any meetings or travel costs related to such response. The City is under no obligation to any 

responding party until a Contract is executed for the services described herein. 

2. Interest in More than One Bid and Collusion 

Multiple Bids submitted in response to a single Solicitation from an individual, firm, partnership, 

corporation, affiliate or association under the same or different names shall be rejected. Reasonable 

grounds for believing that any Bidder has interest in more than one Bid for a single Solicitation, both 

as a Bidder and as a subcontractor for another Bidder, shall result in rejection of all Bid submissions 

in which the Bidder has interest. However, an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, affiliate, or 

association acting only as a subcontractor may be included as a subcontractor for two or more 

Bidders submitting a Bid in response to a single Solicitation. 

Any or all Bid submissions may be rejected if reasonable grounds exist for believing that collusion 

exists among Bidders. Bidders rejected under any of these provisions shall be disqualified from 

responding to a Re-solicitation for the same work. 

3. Accurate Information 

The Bidder certifies that all information provided, or will be provided to the City is true and correct and 

may be relied upon by the City in awarding, modifying, making payments, or taking any other action 

with respect to the Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation. Any false or misleading information 

is grounds for the City to terminate the Contract award to the Bidder. Such termination shall relieve 

the City of any direct or consequential damages or costs incurred by the Contractor. 

4. Addendums and Amendments 

In the event addendums or amendments are issued to this Solicitation, all Terms and Conditions of 

this Solicitation document govern and apply unless specifically modified in such addendums or 

amendments. Verbal or written answers to questions not posted on the City’s website, relative to this 

Solicitation shall not be considered valid or enforceable. 

It is the responsibility of the Bidder to inquire about and obtain any addendums or amendments 

issued to this Solicitation. Any and all addendums or amendments shall be posted on the City’s 

website at www.gaithersburgmd.gov/bids. 

5. Assignment of Contract 

It is mutually understood and agreed that, once awarded the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation, the 

Contractor shall not assign, transfer, convey, sublet or otherwise dispose of its Contract or its right, 

title or interest therein, or its power to execute such Contract, to any other person, vendor, or 

corporation, without the prior written consent of the City Manager or designee, but in no case shall 

such consent relieve the Contractor from its obligations under the Contract, or change the terms of 

the Contract. 

6. Contract Award 

It is the intent of the City to award the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation to one Bidder; however, 

the City reserves the right to award the Contract to multiple Bidders in whole or in part. Award shall 

be to the Bidder whose Bid the City considers, in its sole discretion, to be in the best interest of the 

City, taking into consideration all aspects of the technical and Cost Bids. If for any reason, through no 

fault of the City, the Contract is not signed and executed within thirty (30) days of the Notice of Intent 



to Award, the City may recommend award to the next most responsive and responsible Bidder, or call 

for new Bids entirely. 

All Contracts shall be signed by the City Manager or Designee; any Contract not signed as such shall 

not be considered valid or enforceable. 

7. Acceptance and Rejection of Bid Submissions 

The City reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Bids in whole or in part, to waive any 

technicalities or informalities in Bids, and to postpone or cancel the Bid process at any time if 

determined to serve the best interest of the City. The City may reject a Bid from any Bidder in arrears 

or in default to the City on any Contract, debt, or other obligation. 

Bids shall remain binding for one-hundred eighty (180) calendar days following the date of opening; 

Bids may not be withdrawn any time within this period. In the event an award is not made during 

such period, all Bids shall be automatically extended for an additional one-hundred eighty (180) 

calendar days. Bids shall automatically be renewed until such time as either an award is made or 

proper notice is given to the City of the Bidder’s intent to withdraw its Bid. Bids may only be 

withdrawn by submitting notice in writing at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the expiration of 

the then current one-hundred eighty (180) calendar days period. 

8. Bid Submissions 

All Bid submissions shall be submitted in a sealed envelope by the date and time due and to the 

location specified in this Solicitation. The Solicitation number and title must be clearly visible on the 

outside of the sealed envelope. Bid submissions via facsimile or e-mail is strictly prohibited. 

Any Bid submitted not in compliance with this provision shall be rejected as being nonresponsive. 

9. Late Bid Submissions 

It is the responsibility of the Bidder to ensure delivery of their Bid submission by the date and time 

due and to the designated location specified in this Solicitation. Bids delivered late or to any office or 

location other than the designated location shall not be considered and will be returned unopened to 

the Bidder. 

The City assumes no responsibility for delays or errors in delivery. Postmarking by the due date shall 

not substitute for actual receipt. 

10. Modified and Alternate Bid Submissions 

Bidders are expected to clearly respond to the requirements of this Solicitation. Modified or alternate 

Bid submissions for the services or materials required will result in rejection of the Bid as being 

nonresponsive. 

11. Errors in Bid Submissions 

Bidders shall thoroughly examine and are expected to be familiar with the Specifications in this 

Solicitation. The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive, examine, or understand this Solicitation, 

shall in no way relieve any Bidder of its obligations with respect to this Solicitation or the subsequent 

Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation. The submission of a Bid shall be taken as prima facie 

evidence of compliance with this paragraph. Obvious error(s) in calculations in a Bid may not be 

corrected without the prior consent of the City and in the City’s sole discretion, and may be cause to 

reject the Bid, whether or not the City has accepted the Bid. 

12. Errors in Solicitation Documents 

Bidders shall carefully and thoroughly examine all Solicitation documents for accuracy and 

completeness. No claim by any Bidder shall be allowed on the basis that any of the Solicitation 

documents are inaccurate or incomplete. 



13. Invoicing 

Original invoices shall include, at a minimum, the Bidder’s business name, address, telephone and 

fax numbers, and if applicable, email address and corresponding Purchase Order Number. Invoices 

shall be submitted to: 


Accounts Payable 

31 South Summit Avenue. 


14. Payment Terms 

The City’s standard terms of payment are net thirty (30) days. The City may reject as nonresponsive 

any Bid which is conditioned on payment of proper invoices in less than thirty (30) days; however, this 

does not preclude a Bidder from providing a prompt payment discount for payment of invoices in less 

than thirty (30) days. Payments considered past due may be subject to incurred interest not to 

exceed one percent (1%) per month. 

15. Governing Law 

The Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation shall be construed in accordance with the laws and 

regulations of the Federal Government, State of Maryland, and the City of Gaithersburg. For 

purposes of litigation involving the Contract, exclusive venue and jurisdiction shall be in the Circuit 

Court of Maryland for Montgomery County, District Court of Maryland for Montgomery County or the 

United States District Court of Maryland. 

16. Conflict of Interest 

In accordance with the City’s financial disclosure and conflict of interest provisions in the City’s ethics 

law, a prerequisite for payment pursuant to the terms of the Contract awarded pursuant to this 

Solicitation is that the Contractor shall complete and submit a Conflict of Interest Certification Form. 

17. Contract Award Protest 

All disputes arising under the Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation, not disposed of by 

agreement, must be decided under procedures a-d below. Pending final resolution of a dispute, the 

Contractor shall proceed diligently with Contract performance. Any claim for dispute must be in 

writing for a sum certain and must be fully supported by all cost and pricing information. 

a. All disputes, claims, questions of fact or interpretations of the Contract documents not 

disposed of by agreement or express provision of the Contract arising between the City and 

the Contractor after performance of the Contract has commenced but before final payment 

and termination of the Contract, are decided by the City Manager or designee. 

b. The City Manager or designee shall give the Contractor not less than three (3) working days 

to submit documentation and written reasons supporting the Contractor's position in the 

dispute. The City Manager or designee may consider any other information or written 

submissions from City employees or agents and may conduct an informal, non-record 

hearing for receipt of testimony, evidence, and argument. The City Attorney may participate 

in the hearings to protect the City's interest. 

c. The City Manager or designee shall render a decision in writing, stating reasons for such 

decision and provide copies to the Contractor and the City Attorney. If the decision is mailed 

to the Contractor, it must be mailed "Certified" and dated the date of mailing; otherwise, it 

must be dated the date of delivery to the Contractor. 

d. The written decision of the City Manager or designee shall be sent to all parties. Such 

decision may be submitted to Binding Arbitration by either party under the auspices of an 

arbitrator appointed by the American Arbitration Association. 



18. Solicitation Protest 

Any protest of this Solicitation shall be in writing to the City Attorney. The provisions of COMAR Title 

21.01.03.01A (7), State Procurement Regulations, do not apply to municipalities and are not 

applicable to this Solicitation. 

Protests of alleged improprieties in this Solicitation which are apparent before the Solicitation closing 

date and time shall be filed before the closing date and time of this Solicitation. 

Any written protest shall include, at a minimum, the following: 

a. The protestor’s name and address; 

b. Solicitation number and title; 

c. A statement of reasons for the protest; and 

d. Supporting exhibits, evidence, or documents to substantiate any claims unless not available 

within the filing time, in which case the expected availability date shall be indicated. 

19. Additional Goods or Services 

The City reserves the right to evaluate additional or new goods or services which may be in the best 

interest of the City and may negotiate the price of such goods or services with the successful Bidder 

or with another Bidder, whichever is determined to be the most advantageous to the City. While 

pricing for such additional or new goods or services may be requested in this Solicitation, the City is 

under no obligation to consider such information when selecting the successful Bidder unless 

otherwise stated. 

20. Changes 

The City, without invalidating the Contract resulting from this Solicitation, may order changes in work 

within the general scope of the Contract, consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, and with 

the Contract sum and time being adjusted accordingly. 

Any cost or credit to the City from a change in work shall be determined by mutual agreement 

between the City and the Contractor. The Contractor shall do all work that may be required to 

complete the Contract at the price agreed upon. 

Any alterations of variables to the terms of the Contract shall not be valid or binding upon the City 

unless made in writing and signed by the City Manager or designee. 

21. Cancellation 

The Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation may be canceled or annulled by the City Manager 

or designee by written Notice of Default to the Contractor, upon nonperformance or violation of the 

Contract terms. Upon such cancellation or annulment, an award may be made to another Contractor. 

In any event, the defaulting Contractor shall be liable to the City, for costs to the City for all costs 

caused the City, including reasonable attorney’s fees which are the result of Contractor’s default. 

22. Termination 

a. Termination for Cause 

If through any cause, the Contractor fails to fulfill in a timely and proper manner its obligations 

under the Contract resulting from this Solicitation, or if the Contractor violates any of the 

provisions of said Contract, the City may upon written notice to the Contractor, terminate the 

right of the Contractor to proceed under the Contract or with such part or parts of the Contract 

to which there has been default, and may hold the Contractor liable for any damages caused 

the City by reason of such default and termination. In the event of such termination, any 

completed services performed by the Contractor under the Contract shall, at the option of the 

City become its property and the Contractor shall be entitled to receive equitable 

compensation for any work completed to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor, 

however, shall not thereby be relieved of liability to the City for damages sustained by the 

City by reason of any breach of the Contract by the Contractor, and the City may withhold 



any payments to the Contractor for the purpose of setoff until such time as the amount of 

damages due the City from the Contractor is determined. The Contractor shall not be 

responsible for damages under this article solely for reasons of delay if the delay is due to 

causes beyond its control and without its fault or negligence, but this shall not prevent the 

City from terminating the Contract because of such delay. 

b. Termination for Convenience 

The City may, upon written notice and without cause, terminate the Contract resulting from 

this Solicitation in whole or in part at any time for its convenience. In such instance, payment 

shall be made to the Contractor for the reasonable costs of the work performed through the 

date of termination. Termination costs do not include lost profits, consequential damages, 

delay damages, unabsorbed or under absorbed overhead of the Contractor or its 

subcontractors or suppliers. Failure of the Contractor to include a termination for 

convenience clause into its subcontracts and material Purchase Orders shall not expose the 

City to liability for lost profits in conjunction with a termination for convenience. 

The Contractor expressly waives any damages, delay damages, or indirect costs which may 

arise from the City’s election to terminate the Contract in whole or in part for its convenience. 

c. Termination for Non-Appropriation of Funds 

The City shall not be obligated to the Contract resulting from this Solicitation for any future 

fiscal year until funds are appropriated for each such future fiscal year. In the event funding 

appropriation is not approved, the City may, upon written notice, terminate the Contract in 

whole or in part and without penalty or expense to the City. The effect of such action shall 

terminate the Contract on the last day of the fiscal year for which appropriations were made. 

23. Confidentiality 

a. The City agrees, to the extent permitted by law and in accordance with the terms set forth in 

this Solicitation, to hold all confidential material information belonging to the Bidder in strictest 

confidence. The Bidder shall specify in writing to the City, the information or material which 

the Bidder deems to be a trade secret or other confidential material. Written notification shall 

also contain the reason such information is considered to be a trade secret or confidential. 

b. The Bidder awarded the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation agrees to hold all materials and 

information belonging to the City or its agents in strictest confidence and not to release, 

disclose or make use thereof other than for the performance of contractual obligations. 

24. Dissemination of Data 

The Bidder awarded the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation shall not release any information related 

to the goods, services or performance of the services under the Contract or publish any reports or 

documents related to the goods, services or performance of services to the City without the prior 

written approval of the City. 

The Contractor shall include a similar provision in all subcontracts. 

25. Inspection of Records 

The Contractor shall make available to the City, State of Maryland and any appropriate Federal 

agency, all records and documents with respect to any matters under the Contract awarded pursuant 

to this Solicitation at any time during normal business hours, as often as the City deems necessary, to 

audit, examine, and make excerpts or transcripts of all relevant data. 


26. Ownership 

All data, information, materials and documents submitted in response to this Solicitation shall become 

property of the City and may be returned at the sole discretion of the City. It is agreed that all data, 

information, materials and documents prepared by the Contractor, as required by the Contract, shall 



e delivered to and remain the property of the City upon completion or termination of the Contract. 

Such data, information, materials and documents shall be put to any use as the City sees fit without 

compensation or reimbursement to the Contractor other than the fees to be paid under the Contract 

terms. 

27. Retention of Records 

The Contractor shall retain all records and documents relating to the services under the Contract 

awarded pursuant to this Solicitation for a minimum of five (5) years following payment of the final 

invoice. 


28. Indemnification 

The Contractor awarded the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation shall indemnify and hold harmless 

the City, its officials and employees from the following: 

a. Any and all direct or indirect damages, costs, claims, actions, suits, judgments or liens 

resulting from the negligent act or commission or omission of the Contractor, its employees, 

agents or subcontractors, and 

b. Any and all direct or indirect costs, claims, actions, suits, judgments or liens for damages 

resulting from the Contract arising from the negligence or omission of the Contractor, its 

employees, agents or subcontractors. The Contractor shall, upon completion of work, 

provide the City with a Release of Liens from any subcontractor, supplier, material, or other 

supplier of goods and services to the project. 

29. Inconsistent Provisions 

Notwithstanding any provisions to the contrary in the Terms and Conditions of any Contract supplied 

by the Contractor, the conditions of this Solicitation and the Contract awarded pursuant to this 

Solicitation supersede those Terms and Conditions in the event of inconsistency. 

30. Insurance 

The Contractor awarded the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation shall be responsible for obtaining 

keeping in force the following policies of insurance in the following amounts: 

• General comprehensive insuring against personal injury and property damage in an amount 

no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000); and 

• Workman’s compensation for all non-City employees and workers in an amount no less than 

one million dollars ($1,000,000). 

Prior to the signing of the final Contract by the City Manager or designee, the Contractor shall be 

required to submit a Certificate of Insurance evidencing such policies and amounts and naming the 

City as an additional insured. 

31. Immigration Reform and Control Act 

The Contractor awarded the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation shall warrant that it does not and 

shall not hire, recruit or refer for a fee, for employment under the Contract, an alien knowing the alien 

is an unauthorized alien and hire any individual without complying with the requirements of the 

Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (the Act), including but not limited to any verification and 

record keeping requirements. The Contractor shall further assure the City that, in accordance with 

the Act, it does not and will not discriminate against an individual with respect to hiring, or recruitment 

or referral for a fee, of the individual for employment or the discharging of the individual from 

employment because of such individual's national origin or in the case of a citizen or intending citizen, 

because of such individual's citizenship status. 



32. Non-Discrimination Requirements 

The Contractor awarded the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation shall not discriminate against any 

employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, religion, ancestry, sex, sexual 

orientation, national origin, affection preference, disability, age, marital status or status with regard to 

public assistance or as a disabled veteran or veteran of the Vietnam era. 

The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants and employees are treated 

without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, ancestry, sex, sexual orientation, national origin, 

affection preference, disability, age, marital status or status with regard to public assistance or as a 

disabled veteran or veteran of the Vietnam era. Such action shall include but not be limited to the 

following: employment, upgrade, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or 

termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including 

apprenticeship. 

The Contractor shall, in all Solicitations for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receive 

consideration for employment without regard to race, color, creed, religion, ancestry, sex, sexual 

orientation, national origin, affection preference, disability, age, marital status or status with regard to 

public assistance or as a disabled veteran or veteran of the Vietnam era. The Contractor agrees to 

use clauses similar to those above in all Contracts and subcontracts. In the event the Contractor fails 

to comply with the nondiscrimination clauses of the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation, or fails to 

include such Contract provisions in all Contracts and subcontracts, as hereinabove provided, the 

Contract may at the sole discretion of the City be declared void AB INITIO, canceled, terminated or 

suspended in whole or in part with waiver of any recourse by the Contractor against the City or its 

officials or employees, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Contracts with the 

City. 

Any employee, applicant for employment, or prospective employee with information concerning any 

breach of these requirements may communicate such information to the City Manager or designee 

who shall commence a prompt investigation of the alleged violation. Pursuant to such investigation, 

the Contractor shall permit access to their books, records and accounts. In the event the City 

Manager or designee concludes, on the basis of such investigation, that the Contractor has failed to 

comply with the nondiscrimination clauses, the City Manager or designee may invoke the remedies 

hereinabove set out. 

33. Independent Contractor Status/Personnel 

a. The Contractor shall perform the Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation as an 

independent Contractor and shall not be considered an agent or employee of the City nor 

shall any of the employees or agents of the Contractor be considered subagents or 

employees of the City. 

b. The Contractor shall utilize personnel listed in their final Bid submission. Substitution of key 

personnel shall only be permitted with the prior written permission of the City. This provision, 

however, does not require the approval of a Contract of employment between the Contractor 

and the personnel assigned to provide the services herein. 

c. No employee or elected official of the City, or any appointed official subject to the City’s 

Ethics Laws whose duties as such employee or official include matters relating or affecting 

the subject matter of this Solicitation shall, while such employee, or for one year thereafter, 

become or be an employee, agent or representative, directly or indirectly, of the Contractor or 

any subsidiary thereof. 

d. Unless waived in writing by both the City and appropriate State and Federal agencies prior to 

award of the Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation, no member, officer, or employee 

of the local public body, whether elected or appointed, during his or her tenure or for one (1) 

year thereafter shall have any interest, direct or indirect, in such Contract or the proceeds 

thereof. 



34. Use of Broker 

The Bidder warrants that no person or selling agency has been employed or retained to solicit or 

secure the Contract awarded pursuant to this Solicitation upon an agreement or understanding for a 

commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee, except bona fide employees, or bona fide 

established commercial or selling agencies maintained by the Bidder for the purpose of securing 

business. For violation of this provision, the City shall have the right to terminate or suspend the 

Contract without liability to the City, its officials, or employees or in its discretion to deduct from the 

Contract price or consideration, the full amount of such commission, percentage, brokerage, or 

contingent fee. 

35. Accounting System and Audit 

The Bidder certifies that the Bidder's accounting system conforms to Generally Accepted Accounting 

Principles (GAAP) and is sufficient to comply with the Bidder's budgetary and financial obligations. 

The Bidder awarded the Contract pursuant to this Solicitation agrees to maintain all necessary source 

documentation and enforce sufficient internal controls as dictated by Generally Accepted Accounting 

Principles (GAAP) to properly account for expenses incurred under the Contract. All accounting 

records and supportive documentation shall be maintained in such a manner that will provide for a 

separation between direct and indirect costs. 

The City may examine the Contractor's records to determine and verify compliance with the Contract. 

The Contractor shall grant the City access to these records at all reasonable times during the 

Contract term and for a period of five (5) years following payment of the final invoice. The Contractor 

shall make such records available for examination by Federal, State or County authorities if the 

Contract is supported to any extent with Federal, State or County funds. 


36. Patents 

Whenever any article, material, appliance, process composition, means or things called for by the 

Specifications of this Solicitation is covered by Letters of Patent, the successful Bidder must secure, 

before using or employing such materials the assent in writing of the owner or licensee of such 

Letters of Patent and file the same with the City. 

The successful Bidder shall defend, at its own expense, and shall pay the cost and damages 

awarded in any action brought against the City based on an allegation that the items provided by the 

Bidder infringe on any patent, copyright, license or trade secret. In the event that an injunction shall 

be obtained against the City’s use of items by reason of infringement of any patent, copyright, license 

or trade secret, the Bidder shall, at its own expense, procure for the City the right to continue using 

the items or replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing. 



SECTION VII – SUPPLEMENTAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS 

1. Environmental Concerns and Protection 

All hazardous material disposals shall include manifesting and record keeping per the standards 

established by the State of Maryland Department of Environmental Protection and any Federal 

guidelines, rules, laws, or ordinances. Materials encountered may include but are not necessarily 

limited to contaminated soil, lead paint, asbestos fiber containing insulation materials (ACM), and lead 

shielded electric cabling. Any petroleum or otherwise contaminated soil encountered shall be 

addressed in a similar manner. 

2. City Representatives 

a. The work shall be under the general direction of the City’s assigned Project Manager. Except 

in connection with the “disputes contract clause”, the Facilities and Capital Projects Director 

or designee shall be the authorized technical representative of the City Manager and shall 

have complete charge of, and exercise full supervision of, the work so far as it affects the 

interest of the City. 

b. City Project Manager: The City’s Project Manager serves at the direction of the Facilities and 

Capital Projects Director. The City’s Project Manager is the City’s primary contact for work in 

the field and work coordination issues. The Facilities and Capital Projects Director serves as 

the Contract Administrator. 

c. The provisions of this paragraph or provisions elsewhere in this Contract regarding 

supervision, approval or direction by the Facilities and Capital Projects Director or the City’s 

Project Manager or action taken pursuant thereto, are not intended to and shall not relieve 

the Contractor of responsibility for the accomplishment of the work, either as regards 

sufficiency or the time of performance, except as expressly otherwise provided for in this 

Contract. 

d. Pursuant to the Contract, the term City Project Manager shall mean, the City’s Project 

Manager of the Facilities and Capital Projects Division; except in connection with the 

"disputes clauses" as indicated in the General Conditions of the Contract. 

e. The Purchasing Authority’s Technical Representative (PATR) may designate one or more 

additional representatives to observe the work, provided however, that the presence of these 

or any other City representatives shall in no way constitute an approval of means, methods or 

materials which do not conform to the requirements of the Contract documents. 

3. Contractor’s Assumption of Risk 

The City assumes no risk for life, property or personnel during the life of this Contract. In addition, the 

Contractor assumes the risk and shall be solely liable and responsible for the protection of City 

property within and adjacent to the construction site; for keeping the site secure from unauthorized 

personnel; and providing adequate lighting and emergency egress. 

4. No Waiver by the City 

The failure of the City in any one or more instances to insist upon strict performance of any terms of 

the Contract or to exercise any option herein conferred shall not be construed as a waiver or 

relinquishment to any extent of the right to assert or rely upon such terms or options on any future 

occasion. 

5. Contractor’s Duties and Responsibilities 

a. Duties of the Contractor 

The Contractor shall perform all the work and shall furnish, at its own cost and expense, all 

labor, materials, equipment and other facilities, except as herein otherwise provided, as may 



e necessary and proper for the performance and completion of the work. The Contractor 

shall be responsible for the entire work until completed and finally accepted by the City. 

b. Supervision and Construction Procedures 

The Contractor shall supervise and direct the work and coordinate the work with that of 

separate Contractors or subcontractors, using its best skill and attention. Unless otherwise 

expressly provided, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over 

construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating 

all portions of the work under the Contract. Unless otherwise expressly provided, the means 

and methods of construction shall be such as the Contractor may choose, provided however, 

that the Contractor shall employ adequate and safe procedures, methods, structures and 

equipment. Neither the City's approval nor his failure to exercise his right of approval shall 

relieve the Contractor of his obligation to accomplish the results intended by the Contract, nor 

shall the City's approval or failure to approve create a cause of action for damages. 

c. Review of Contract Documents 

The Contractor shall study and review the Contract documents and shall compare them with 

each other and with such information made available by the City. The Contractor shall advise 

the Purchasing Authority’s Technical Representative (PATR) of any errors, inconsistencies or 

omissions discovered by him. The Contractor shall not be liable to the City or the Architect 

for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract documents, 

unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and failed to report it 

to the PATR. In the event of inconsistencies or conflicting requirements, the most stringent 

requirement shall be enforced. Where there appears to be overlapping or conflicting 

requirements in the Drawings and Specifications, the order of precedence shall be: 

Specifications, Large Scale Drawings and Details, Small Scale Drawings and Details. 

d. Qualifications of the Contractor 

The Contractor represents that it is a duly organized and licensed entity which employs 

qualified and experienced personnel who specialize in performing the type of construction 

services required hereunder. The Contractor agrees to provide a sufficient number of 

personnel who are suitably qualified and experienced and who are in all respects acceptable 

to the City to perform the work in an efficient and timely manner. The Contractor represents 

that it is capable in all respects (including the possession of sufficient financial resources to 

provide fully for the payment of employees) of performing the work and agrees to provide 

construction services of high quality. The Contractor agrees to diligently and conscientiously 

devote its resources to the performance of the work. The City, upon written notice to the 

Contractor, and in the City's sole discretion, shall have the right to direct the Contractor to 

remove an employee permanently from the site for any reason. 

e. Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 

The Contractor shall be responsible and accountable to the City for the acts and omissions of 

its employees in connection with the performance of the work and for any subcontractors or 

other persons performing any of the work under a Contract with the Contractor or a Contract 

with a subcontractor. 

f. Permits and Licenses 

The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, licenses, and inspections necessary to 

properly execute the work specified in the Contract. The fee for the City of Gaithersburg 

required permits will be waived. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all 

laws, ordinances, rules, and lawful orders. If the Contractor observes that any portion of the 

Contract is at variance with applicable laws, statutes, and building codes, the Contractor shall 

promptly notify the City in writing and necessary changes will be accomplished by 

modification. 



g. Compliance with Laws 

The Contractor shall be responsible for giving all notices and complying with all laws, 

ordinances, rules, regulations and directives of any public authority bearing on the 

performance of the work. Should the Contractor determine that the Contract documents, or 

any of them, do not conform to such laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and directives in any 

respect, he shall promptly inform the PATR of such fact in writing. If the Contractor performs 

any work knowing it to be in conflict with such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations without 

notification to the City, he shall accept all responsibility and bear all costs relating thereto. 

Contractor shall administer this project in conformance with all laws, regulations, and policies 

of the State of Maryland, Montgomery County, and the City of Gaithersburg. 

h. Drawings and Specifications at the Site 

The Contractor shall maintain one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved 

Shop Drawings and Change Orders at the site of the project. All of the documents are to be 

kept in good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. The 

documents shall be made available to the City during performance of the work. Upon 

completion of the work, the Drawings, together with all changes and revisions made during 

construction of the project, shall be delivered to the PATR. 

i. Shop Drawings and Submittals 

Contractor shall review, approve, and timely submit all Shop Drawings, Product Data and 

Samples required by the Contract in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work. By 

submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, the Contractor represents that it has 

determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria, and 

that it has checked and coordinated the information contained with the requirements of the 

work and the Contract. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation 

from the requirements of the Contract by the City’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, 

or Samples. No portion of the work requiring submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or 

Samples shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by the City. Three (3) 

copies of each submittal shall be submitted. 

j. Use of Site 

The Contractor shall confine the work to areas permitted by the Contract documents and any 

applicable laws, ordinances or permits and shall not unreasonably encumber the project with 

any materials or equipment. 

k. Subcontractors 

Unless otherwise specified in the Contract documents, within seven (7) days after the award 

of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a written statement to the City setting forth the 

name, address, and telephone number of each proposed subcontractor and subsubcontractor 

and the portion of the work and materials for which each such subcontractor or 

sub-subcontractor is responsible. The Contractor also must furnish any other information 

requested by the City intended to prove that the proposed subcontractor or sub-subcontractor 

has the necessary facilities, skill, integrity, safety records, past experience and financial 

resources to perform the work in accordance with the Terms and Conditions of the Contract 

documents. 

(1) If the City finds, in its sole and absolute discretion, that the proposed subcontractor 

or sub-subcontractor is not responsible or is otherwise not qualified to perform its 

work, the Contractor will be notified promptly in writing. If no such notice is 

provided, the City shall be deemed to have accepted the subcontractor or subsubcontractor. 

The City may retract its acceptance of any subcontractor or subsubcontractor 

in the event such subcontractor or sub-subcontractor evidences an 

unwillingness or inability to perform its work in strict accordance with the Contract 

documents. Notice of such retraction will be given in writing to the Contractor. 

Upon receipt of notification of such rejection or retraction, the Contractor shall 



submit a new subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for the City's review. Any net 

increase in the Contractor's cost of performance resulting from the required 

substitution(s) shall be adjusted by appropriate Change Order, provided, however, 

that no increase in the Contract sum will be allowed for substitutions where the 

rejected subcontractor or sub-subcontractor is unlicensed, debarred, or otherwise 

manifestly not capable of performing in accordance with the Contract documents. 

(2) The Contractor shall not enter into a subcontract with any subcontractor who has 

been rejected by the City. 

(3) By an appropriate agreement, the Contractor shall require each subcontractor, for 

which it executes a subcontract, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the 

Contract documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all of the obligations and 

responsibilities which the Contractor, by these documents, assumes toward the City. 

(4) Upon request, the Contractor promptly shall file with the City a conformed copy of 

any one or more of its subcontracts. 

(5) The City's review or acceptance of subcontractors or sub-subcontractors as 

described herein shall not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities, duties 

and liabilities hereunder. The Contractor shall be solely responsible to the City for 

the acts, defaults, or omissions of its subcontractors and sub-subcontractors, and of 

its subcontractors' and sub-subcontractors’ officers, authorized representatives and 

employees. 

l. Payments to Subcontractors 

Within seven (7) days after receipt of payment from the City, the Contractor shall: 

(1) Pay each subcontractor an amount equal to the percentage of the work attributable 

to such subcontractor, less an amount equal to the percentage of payments to be 

retained by the City from the Contractor; or 

(2) Notify the City and the subcontractor in writing of the intention to withhold all or part 

of the amounts due a subcontractor and state the reason for such withholding. 

m. Cutting, Patching and Restoration of Work 

The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, patching and restoration of the work 

or of the work of other Contractors or of existing work of the City. The Contractor shall not 

cut or alter the work of the City or of another Contractor without the consent of the City. 

6. Disputed Work 

If the Contractor is of the opinion that any work required, necessitated, or ordered by the City, or any 

action required or ordered by the City to be taken or not taken, violates the terms and provisions of 

this Contract, he shall, within four (4) days of commencing such work or action, notify the City, in 

writing, of its contentions with respect thereto and request a final determination thereof. The 

Purchasing Authority will make a determination within ten (10) days of the written request. In order to 

preserve its right to claim compensation for such work, or damages resulting from such compliance, 

the Contractor shall, within two (2) days after receiving notice of the Purchasing Authority’s 

determination and direction, notify the City, in writing, that the work is being performed or that the 

determination and direction is being complied with under protest. Failure of the Contractor to so 

notify the City as provided herein shall constitute a waiver and release of the Contractor's right to 

claim compensation for any work or damages resulting from such compliance. Nothing herein shall 

alter the Contractor's obligation to comply with any other provision of the Contract documents. 



SECTION VIII - ATTACHMENTS 

City Forms 

Sample Contract 

Plans and Specifications 



CITY FORMS 

Bidders must complete the following forms attached hereto in their entirety and include such forms in 

their Bid submission: 

• Quotation Sheet 

• Amendment Acknowledgement 

• Affidavit of Qualification to Bid (Requires Notary) 

• Conflict of Interest Certification (Requires Notary) 

• Litigation and Lien Information 

• Response to Solicitation Submission Certification (Requires Notary) 

• Project Experience Form. A list providing a minimum of three (3) verifiable references who can be 

contacted to verify past performance in work same to this Solicitation. The list shall include the 

name and phone number of each reference; a brief description of the work performed; the schedule 

for completing the work; and the value of the work. 

Failure by any Bidder to submit any of these forms with their Bid may cause their Bid to be 

rejected as non-responsive.


Quotation Sheet 

Solicitation No. 2014-002 

Please complete and sign this form in its entirety and include it with your bid submission. 

Category Cost ($) 

General Requirements 

Site Work 

Concrete 

Masonry 

Metals 

Wood and Plastics 

Thermal and Moisture Protection 

Openings 

Finishes 

Specialties 

Furnishings 

Plumbing 

Electrical 

Communication 

Electronic Safety and Security 

Earthwork 

Additional (list in a separate sheet) 

Profit and Overhead 

Total Cost 

By my signature I hereby testify that I am a duly authorized representative of the firm and that I have fully entered, 

examined and reviewed the items and totals represented on this quotation sheet and they are accurate and complete 

Name of Bidder: ______________________________ 

Signature: ___________________________________ Date: _______________________________ 

Print Name: ________________________________ 

Title: ________________________________


Addendum/Amendment Acknowledgment 

This form must be completed and submitted with the bidder’s bid submission. 


The bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following addendum(s) and/or amendment(s) and attests that all 

requirements stated therein have been incorporated into the bidder’s bid submission. 

• Addendum / Amendment No: __________ Date of Issuance: 





Name of Bidder: 

Signature: 

Date: 

Printed Name: 

Title: 

Page 1 of 1 Updated 04/2013


Affidavit of Qualification to Bid/Propose 


Please complete this form in its entirety and include it with your submission response. For the purpose of 

completing this form, “entity” means an individual, sole proprietor, partnership, corporation, limited liability 

corporation (LLC), company, or association. 

* Does not apply to individuals or sole proprietors – indicate with “N/A” 

I HEREBY AFFIRM THAT: 

1. I am the and the duly authorized representative 

Title 

of the entity and that I possess the legal authority 

Name of Entity 

to make this affidavit on behalf of myself and the entity for which I am acting. 

* 2. The entity is either a Maryland corporation or is a 

foreign corporation properly registered with the Maryland State Department of Assessments and 

Taxation, in compliance with the State of Maryland Code of Regulations, Title 21, State Procurement 

Regulations. 

3. Except as described in Paragraph five (5) below, neither I nor the above entity, nor to the best of my 

knowledge, any of its officers, directors, or partners, or any of its employees directly involved in 

obtaining contracts with the State of Maryland or any municipality, county, bi-county, or multicounty 

agency, or subdivision of the State of Maryland have been convicted of, or have pleaded nolo 

contendere to a charge of, or have, during the course of an official investigation or other proceeding, 

admitted in writing or under oath, acts of omissions which constitute bribery, attempted bribery, or 

conspiracy to bribe, whether or not in furtherance of obtaining a contract with a public body, under 

the provisions Md. Code Ann., State Finance and Procurement Article, §16-202 (1995 Repl. Vol.) 

and Article 27 of the Annotated Code of Maryland or under the laws of any local, state or the federal 

government (conduct prior to July 2, 1977 is not required to be reported). 

4. List any conviction, plea, or admission described in paragraph three (3) above, with the date, court, 

official, or administrative body; the individuals involved and their position with the entity; and the 

sentence or disposition, if any. Otherwise, state “none” as appropriate. 

5. Neither I nor the above entity, nor to the best of my knowledge an officer, partner, controlling 

stockholder or principal of the responder, or any other person substantially involved in the 

responder’s contracting activities has: (1) been convicted under the laws of the State of Maryland, 

another state or the United States of: (i) a criminal offense incident to obtaining, attempting to obtain, 

or performing a public or private contract, except as provided in Section 16-202 of the State Finance 

and Procurement Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland; or (ii) fraud, embezzlement, theft, 

forgery, falsification or destruction of records, or receiving stolen property; (2) been convicted of a 

criminal violation of an antitrust statute of the State of Maryland, another state or the United States; 

(3) been convicted of a violation of the Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organization Act, or the 

Mail Fraud Act, for acts in connection with the submission of bids or proposals for a public or private 

Form No. SS-100 Page 1 of 2 Updated 09/2012

Affidavit of Qualification to Bid/Propose 


contract; (4) been convicted of a violation of Section 14-308 of the State Finance and Procurement 

Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland; (5) been convicted of a conspiracy to commit any act or 

omission that would constitute grounds for conviction under any of the laws or statutes described 

herein; (6) been found civilly liable under an antitrust statute of the State of Maryland, another state 

or the United States for acts or omissions in connection with the submission of bids or proposals for a 

public or private contract. 

6. Responder hereby declares that this bid or proposal is made without any connection or collusion with 

any person, entity or corporation making a bid or proposal for the same work; that pursuant to this 

affidavit; that the attached specifications and any drawings referred to herein have been carefully 

examined and are understood; that careful examination has been made as is necessary to become 

informed as to the character and extent of the work required; and, that if this bid proposal is accepted, 

this Responder will contract to do, for the price stated in the attached cost proposal, all of the work 

described in the specifications, drawings and contract conditions. 

7. I acknowledge that this affidavit is to be furnished to the City Manager or designee for the City of 

Gaithersburg, Maryland. I further acknowledge that, if the representations set forth in this affidavit 

are not true and correct, the City of Gaithersburg may terminate any contract awarded and take any 

other appropriate action. 

I do solemnly declare and affirm under the penalties of perjury that the contents of this affidavit are 

true and correct. 

Signature 

Witness 

Date 

Notary Attestation: 

State of: 

County of: 

I hereby certify that on this day of , 20 , before me the 

subscriber, a Notary Public in and for the State of 

and County aforesaid, 

personally appeared 

, known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed 

to this instrument and acknowledged that same was executed for the purposes contained therein. 

Witness my hand and Notarial seal: 

My Commission expires: 

Notary Public: 

Print Name 



Conflict of Interest Certification 





* Does not apply to individuals or sole proprietors – indicate with “N/A” 

Name of Entity: 

* Federal ID No: 

Contact Person: 

Street Address: 

City, State & Zip Code: , 

Telephone Numbers: (P) (F) 

(P) 

(C) 

Email Address: 


CONFLICT OF INTEREST CERTIFICATION 

I HEREBY CERTIFY, on behalf of that no employee, 

agent or elected official of the City of Gaithersburg, or member of a commission, board or corporation 

controlled or appointed by the Mayor and Council of the City of Gaithersburg has received or has been 

promised directly or indirectly, any financial benefit by way of fee, commission, finder’s fee, or in any 

other manner, remuneration directly or indirectly related to this contract. Upon request by the City 

Manager or designee, or other authorized agent, as a prerequisite to payment pursuant to the terms of a 

contract awarded pursuant to this bid or proposal submission, will furnish to the City, under oath, answers 

to any interrogatories and comply with any request to review documents related to a possible conflict of 

interest as herein embodied. 

I HEREBY CERTIFY, on behalf of 

that no employee or 

agent of 

is a member, employee, or elected official of the 

City of Gaithersburg of any agency, commission, or board of the City of Gaithersburg or is the spouse or 


Conflict of Interest Certification 


any other relative of any of the foregoing. If unable to so certify, the details of any such relationship with 

the City of Gaithersburg are as follows: 

I do solemnly declare and affirm under the penalties of perjury that the contents of this affidavit are true 

and correct. 

Signature 

Witness 

Date 













Print Name 



Litigation & Lien Information 









LITIGATION 

Is your entity currently involved in any litigation or had a litigation claim(s) within the previous twentyfour 

(24) month period? 

Yes / 

No 

If yes, please provide a detailed list including case number, jurisdiction, status and brief summary of such 

litigation. 

Case No. Jurisdiction Status Summary 

LIENS 

Does your entity have any outstanding mechanics liens? 

Yes / No: If yes, please explain: 

Does your entity have any outstanding tax liens? 

Yes / No: If yes, please explain: 

Signature Title Date 

Printed Name 



Response to Solicitation Submission Certification 





Proposal Submitted By: 




Federal ID Number: 



The response to Solicitation No. 2014-002 as submitted includes this Response to Solicitation Submission 

Certification Form and the Affidavit of Qualification to Bid/Propose Form, Conflict of Interest 

Certification Form, and Litigation & Lien Information Form. I, the undersigned, hereby attest to the truth 

and completeness of the information and responses provided and certify that my entity has met the 

minimum selection criteria as outlined in the solicitation document. 

Signature: 













Print Name 



Project Experience Form 

Please complete this form in its entirety and include it with your bid submission. 


Bidders shall list three (3) projects completed in the last three (3) years which are similar to the Services required 

in the Solicitation. 

Project 1 of 3 

Name of Contact: 


Suite or Unit Number: 

City, State and Zip Code: 


Phone Number: 

Value of Contract: $ 

Start date: 

Completion date: 

Scope of Work: 











Phone Number: 

Value of Contract: $ 

Start date: 













Phone Number: 

Value of Contract: 

$ 

Start date: 




Sample Contract 

The following 

Contract must be 

Completed by the 

SUCCESSFUL BIDDER 

As a 

Condition of Award

SERVICES CONTRACT 

This Contract, made and entered into this day of 2013 by and 

between the City of Gaithersburg, Maryland, a municipal corporation of the State of Maryland, 31 South 

Summit Avenue, Gaithersburg, Maryland 20877 (“City”), and 

a 

Name of Contractor 

licensed to do business in the State of Maryland, 

State and Type (e.g. Virginia Limited Liability Corporation) 

(“Contractor”). 

Contractor’s Address 

RECITALS 

WHEREAS, the City issued Invitation for Bid number 2014-002 (“IFB”) seeking 

construction services for Water Park Facilities (“Services”); and 

WHEREAS, the Contractor submitted the bid deemed by the City to be the lowest most 

responsible and responsive (“Bid Submission”); and 

WHEREAS, the City wishes to hire the Contractor and the Contractor wishes to be hired to 

provide the said Services. 

NOW, THEREFORE, for of good and valuable consideration, the receipt of which is hereby 

acknowledged, and in consideration of the mutual benefits and promises herein made, the Contractor 

agrees to provide the Services, and on terms and conditions as more fully described herein as follows: 

1. The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees to provide the Services in accordance 

and in compliance with all of the requirements and terms and conditions contained in the IFB, which is 

incorporated herein and attached hereto as Exhibit A, and in the Contractor’s Bid Submission, 

incorporated herein and attached hereto as Exhibit B. 

2. The City hereby acknowledges and agrees to pay the Contractor, when due and payable 

pursuant to the terms and conditions of the IFB, compensation in the amount not to exceed $ . 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City and Contractor have executed this Contract as of the date and 

year first above written. 

THE CONTRACTOR: 

________________________________________ 

Official or Duly Authorized Representative 

Witness 

Title 

THE CITY OF GAITHERSBURG: 

________________________________________ 

Tony Tomasello, City Manager 

Witness

Plans and Specifications 

(Prepared by: NIKA Technologies, Inc.)

GAITHERSBURG WATER PARK 

PHASE II IMPROVEMENTS 

512 S Frederick Ave Gaithersburg, MD 20877 

CITY OF GAITHERSBURG, MARYLAND 

SHEET INDEX 

Sheet 

Number 

G101 

G102 

AD101 

A100 

A101 

A401 

A402 

A403 

A404 

A405 

A406 

A407 

A501 

E001 

ED101 

EL101 

EP101 

ET101 

E601 

Sheet Name 

COVER PAGE 

GENERAL NOTES, ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS 

DEMO PLAN 

SITE PLAN 

NEW WORK FLOOR PLAN 

ENLARGED NEW WORK PLAN & ELEVATIONS - ADMIN AREA 

ENLARGED NEW WORK PLAN AND ELEVATIONS - ADA SINKS 

ENLARGED NEW WORK PLAN AND ELEVATIONS - ADA TOILETS 

ENLARGED NEW WORK PLAN AND ELEVATIONS - ADA SHOWERS 

ENLARGED PLANS - SNACK BAR & Q-SYSTEM 

GATEWAY DETAILS 


DETAILS 

SYMBOLS AND ABBREIVATIONS 

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN 

LIGHTING PLAN 

POWER PLAN 

TELECOM PLAN 

ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 

512 S Frederick Ave 

Gaithersburg, MD 20877 

NIKA A+E 

451 HUNGERFORD DRIVE 

4TH FLOOR 

ROCKVILLE, MD 20850 

(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 

www.nika-ae.com 

SITE LOCATION 

SCALE : NTS 

PROJECT SITE 

No. Description Date 

Revisions 

Drawing Title 

COVER PAGE 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 

N 

A/E Project Number 

Project Number 

Date 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 

Drawing Scale: AS NOTED 

CADD Filename 

Revit Model 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

DRP Author 

TJ Checker 

CADD Plot Scale 

1:1 

W 

E 

Sheet 

Number 

G101 

S

ABBREVIATIONS: 

MATERIAL SYMBOLS 

GENERAL NOTES: 

A 

B 

C 

D 

E 

F 

& 

∠ 

@ 

C 

Ø 

P 

# 

ABV 

A/C 

AC 

ACOUST 

ADJ 

AFF 

AHU 

ALT 

ALUM 

ANC 

ANOD 

APPROX 

ARCH 

ASPH 

ASTM 

ATTCH 

AUTO 

AUX 

B 

BB 

BC 

BD 

BF 

BL 

BLDG 

BLKG 

BLKHD 

BM 

BO 

BOT 

BP 

BS 

BSMT 

BTWN 

BUR 

C 

CAB 

CAP 

CAT 

CB 

CCTV 

CEM 

CF 

CFCI 

CH 

CI 

CIR 

CIRC 

CJ 

CLKG 

CLG 

CLR 

CM 

CMU 

CO 

COL 

CONC 

CONSTR 

CONT 

CORR 

CP 

CS 

CSMT 

CT 

CTR 

CWG 

CY 

D 

dB 

DBL 

DEMO 

DET 

DF 

DG 

DH 

DIA 

DIM 

DISP 

DL 

DN 

DP 

DR 

DS 

DWG 

DWR 

(E) 

E 

EA 

EF 

EG 

EGC 

EJ 

ELEC 

ELEV 

ENCL 

ENTR 

EQ 

EQUIP 

EIFS 

ESC 

EST 

EW 

EXH 

EXIST 

EXP 

EXT 

F 

FA 

FBG 

FDN 

FE/BR 

FEW 

FIG 

FIN 

FIXT 

FL 

FLEX 

FLUOR 

FM 

FO 

FRT 

FT 

FTG 

FURN 

FURR 

AND 

ANGLE 

AT 

CENTER LINE 

DIAMETER 

PLATE 

POUND/NUMBER 

ABOVE 

AIR CONDITIONING 

ASPHALT CONCRETE 

ACOUSTICAL 

ADJUSTABLE/ADJACENT 

ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR 

AIR HANDLING UNIT 

ALTERNATE 

ALUMINUM 

ANCHOR 

ANODIZED 

APPROXIMATE 

ARCHITECTURAL 

ASPHALT 

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR 

TESTING AND MATERIALS 

ATTACHMENT 

AUTOMATIC 

AUXILIARY 

BASE 

BASE BID 

BRICK COURSE 

BOARD 

BROOM FINISH 

BUILDING LINE 

BUILDING 

BLOCKING 

BULKHEAD 

BEAM/BENCHMARK 

BY OTHERS/BOTTOM OF 

BOTTOM 

BEARING PLATE 

BOTH SIDES 

BASEMENT 

BETWEEN 

BUILT-UP ROOF 

CONDUIT 

CABINET 

CAPACITY 

CATALOG 

CIRCUIT BREAKER/CATCH BASIN 

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION 

CEMENT/CEMENTITIOUS 

CUBIC FEET 

CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED, 

CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED 

CEILING HEIGHT 

CAST IRON 

CIRCLE 

CIRCUMFERENCE 

CONTROL JOINT 

CAULKING 

CEILING 

CLEAR 

CENTIMETER 

CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT 

CLEAN OUT/CASED OPENING 

COLUMN 

CONCRETE 

CONSTRUCTION 

CONTINUOUS 

CORRIDOR 

CHROME PLATED 

COUNTERSINK 

CASEMENT 

CERAMIC TILE 

CENTER 

CLEAR WIRE GLASS 

CUBIC YARDS 

DEPTH 

DECIBELS 

DOUBLE 

DEMOLISH/DEMOLITION 

DETAIL 

DRINKING FOUNTAIN 

DAY GATE 

DOUBLE HUNG 

DIAMETER 

DIMENSION 

DISPENSER 

DEAD LOAD 

DOWN 

DAMPPROOFING 

DOOR 

DOWNSPOUT 

DRAWING 

DRAWER 

EXISITING 

EAST 

EACH 

EACH FACE 

FOR EXAMPLE 

EPOXY GLAZED COATING 

EXPANSION JOINT 

ELECTRICAL 

ELEVATOR/ELEVATION 

ENCLOSURE 

ENTRANCE 

EQUAL 

EQUIPMENT 

EXTERIOR INSULATION 

& FINISH SYSTEM 

ESCALATOR 

ESTIMATED 

EACH WAY 

EXHAUST 

EXISTING 

EXPANSION/EXPANDED 

EXTERIOR 

FLAME/FLUSH 

FIRE ALARM 

FOIL-BACKED GYPSUM BOARD 

FOUNDATION 

FORCED-ENTRY/BALLISTIC-RESISTANT 

FIRE EXTINGUISHER WALL MOUNTED 

FIGURE 

FINISH 

FIXTURE 

FLASH FLOOR 

FLEXIBLE 

FLUORESCENT 

FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORP. 

FACE OF 

FIRE RETARDANT TREATED 

FOOT/FEET 

FOOTING 

FURNITURE/FURNISHED 

FURRING 

G 

H 

I 

J 

K 

L 

M 

N 

O 

P 

Q 

G 

GA 

GAL 

GALV 

GB 

GC 

GFCI 

GFGI 

GFE 

GL 

GOVT 

GND 

GR 

GWB 

GYP BD 

HC 

HD 

HDWD 

HDWR 

HH 

HM 

HOR 

HP 

HR 

HTG 

HT/H 

HVAC 

HZ 

ID 

IG 

IIC 

IN 

INCL 

INFO 

INSUL 

INT 

JAN 

JB 

JST 

JT 

KD 

KIT 

KO 

KPA 

KW 

L 

L/S 

LAM 

LB 

LBL 

LF 

LG 

LH 

LL 

LP 

LT 

LTG 

M 

MAS 

MAT/MATL 

MAX 

MECH 

MED 

MEMB 

MET/MTL 

MFR 

MH 

MIN 

MIR 

MISC 

MIX 

ML 

MLD 

MM 

MO 

MS 

MT 

MTD 

MTG 

MULL 

N 

N/A 

NIC 

NLB 

NO 

NOM 

NTS 

OC 

OD 

OFF 

OH 

OPHD 

OPNG 

OPP 

OZ 

PA 

PC 

PCF 

PF 

PFB 

PLAM 

PLAS 

PLF 

PNL 

PNT 

POLY 

PR 

PRESS TR 

PRF 

PSF 

PT 

PRCST 

PVC 

PWD 

PTN 

P.T. 

QT 

QTB 

QUAL 

GUTTER 

GAUGE 

GALLON 

GALVANIZED 

GRAB BAR/GYPSUM BOARD 

GENERAL CONTRACTOR 

GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED, 

CONTRACTOR-INSTALLED 

GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED, 

GOVERNMENT-INSTALLED 

GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT 

GLASS/GLAZED 

GOVERNMENT 

GROUND 

GRADING/GRADE 

GYPSUM WALLBOARD 

GYPSUM BOARD 

HOLLOW CORE 

HEAD/HEAVY DUTY 

HARDWOOD 

HARDWARE 

HAND HOLE 

HOLLOW METAL 

HORIZONTAL 

HORSEPOWER 

HOUR 

HEATING/HEAT 

HEIGHT/HIGH 

HEATING, VENTILATING 

& AIR CONDITIONING 

HERTZ 

INSIDE DIAMETER/ 

INTERIOR DIMENSION 

INSULATED GLASS 

IMPACT INSULATION CLASS 

INCH 

INCLUDING 

INFORMATION 

INSULATION 

INTERIOR 

JANITOR 

JAMB 

JOIST 

JOINT 

KNOCK-DOWN/KILN-DRIED 

KITCHEN 

KNOCK OUT 

KILOPASCAL 

KILOWATT 

LONG 

LITERS PER SECOND 

LAMINATE(D) 

POUND/LOAD-BEARING 

LABEL 

LINEAR FEET 

LONG/LENGTH 

LEFT HAND 

LIVE LOAD 

LOW POINT 

LIGHT 

LIGHT/LIGHTING 

METER 

MASONRY 

MATERIAL 

MAXIMUM 

MECHANICAL 

MEDIUM 

MEMBRANE 

METAL 

MANUFACTURER 

MOUNTING HEIGHT 

MINIMUM 

MIRROR 

MISCELLANEOUS 

MIXTURE 

MATCH LINE 

MOLDING 

MILLIMETER 

MASONRY OPENING 

MOTOR STARTER 

MARBLE THRESHOLD 

MOUNTED 

MOUNTING 

MULLION 

NORTH 

NOT APPLICABLE 

NOT IN CONTRACT 

NON-LOAD BEARING 

NUMBER 

NOMINAL 

NOT TO SCALE 

ON CENTER 

OUTSIDE DIAMETER 

OFFICE 

OVERHEAD 

OPPOSITE HAND 

OPENING 

OPPOSITE HAND 

OUNCE(S) 

PASCAL 

PORTLAND CEMENT 

POUNDS PER CUBIC FOOT 

POLISH FINISH 

PREFABRICATE 

PLASTIC LAMINATE 

PLASTER 

POUNDS PER LINEAR FOOT 

PANEL 

PAINT 

POLYETHYLENE 

PAIR 

PRESSURE TREATED 

PREFINISHED 

POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT 

POINT 

PRECAST 

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE 

PLYWOOD 

PARTITION 

PRESSURE TREATED WOOD 

QUARRY TILE 

QUARRY TILE BASE 

QUALITY 

R 

S 

T 

U 

V 

W 

X 

RA 

RAF 

RAD/r 

RCP 

REBAR 

REC 

REF 

REGIS 

REINF 

REM 

REPL 

REQD 

RESIL 

RET 

REV 

RF 

RGS 

RH 

RM 

RO 

RWL 

RWD 

S 

SA 

SAC 

SC 

SCH 

SDG 

SDT 

SECT 

SF 

SG(#) 

SH 

SHTH 

SIM 

SJ 

SM 

SPEC 

SQ 

SQ YD 

SQ FT 

SS 

STA 

STD 

ST STL 

STL 

SUSP 

SV 

SW 

SYM 

SYS 

SHT, SH 

STOR 

STRUCT 

T 

TB 

TC 

TELE 

TEMP 

TER 

TF 

T&G 

THK 

THR 

THRU 

TO 

TOC 

TOS 

TOW 

TW 

TYP 

UC 

UL 

UNF 

UNO 

URM 

V 

(V) 

VAV 

VB 

VCB 

VCT 

VD 

VENT'D 

VERT 

VEST 

VJ 

VOL 

VT 

VWC 

WD 

XFMR 

RETURN AIR 

RELILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING 

RADIUS 

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 

REINFORCING BAR 

RECEPTACLE 

REFERENCE 

REGISTRATION 

REINFORCING/REINFORCED 

REMOVE 

REPLACE 

REQUIRED 

RESILIENT 

RETURN AIR 

REVISE/REVISION 

ROUGH FINISH 

RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL 

RIGHT HAND 

ROOM 

ROUGH OPENING 

RAIN WATER LEADER 

REDWOOD 

SOUTH 

SUPPLY AIR 

SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING 

SOLID CORE 

SCHEDULE 

SIDING 

STATIC DISSIPATIVE TILE 

SECTION 

SEAMLESS FLOORING 

DUCT SECURITY GRILL (TYPE #) 

SHELF 

SHEATHING 

SIMILAR 

STEEL JOIST 

SURFACE MOUNTED 

SPECIFICATION 

SQUARE 

SQUARE YARD 

SQUARE FOOT 

STAINLESS STEEL 

STATION 

STANDARD 

STAINLESS STEEL 

STEEL 

SUSPENDED 

SHEET VINYL 

SWITCH 

SYMMETRICAL 

SYSTEM 

SHEET 

STORAGE 

STRUCTURE 

TREAD/THICK 

TOWEL BAR 

TOP OF CURB 

TELEPHONE/TELECOM 

TEMPORARY 

TERRAZZO 

TROWEL FINISH 

TONGUE & GROOVE 

THICK/THICKNESS 

THRESHOLD 

THROUGH 

TOP OF 

TOP OF CONCRETE 

TOP OF STEEL 

TOP OF WALL 

TOP OF WALL 

TYPICAL 

UNDERCUT 

UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES 

UNFINISHED 

UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 

UNREINFORCED MASONRY 

VENT/VOLT/VALVE 

VERIFY 

VARIABLE AIR VOLUME 

VAPOR BARRIER 

VINYL COVE BASE 

VINYL COMPOSITION TILE 

VOLUME DAMPER/VAULT DOOR 

VENTED 

VERTICAL 

VESTIBULE 

V-JOINT 

VOLUME 

VINYL TILE 

VINYL WALL COVERING 

WOOD 

TRANSFORMER 

EARTH 

GRAVEL OR 

POROUS FILL 

CONCRETE 

MASONRY UNIT 

BRICK 

STONE 

CONCRETE 

FIBROUS 

INSULATION 

REFERENCE SYMBOLS 

WALL SECTION 

BUILDING SECTION 

DETAIL SECTION 

EXTERIOR ELEVATION 

INTERIOR ELEVATION 

LARGE SCALE BLOWUP 

OF PLAN OR DETAIL 

PARTITION TYPE 

DOOR SYMBOL 

EXTERIOR WINDOW 

SYMBOL 

LOUVER SYMBOL 

ROOM NAME AND 

ROOM NAME 

NUMBER 100 

1 

1 

A101 

1 

A101 

1 

A101 

1 

A101 

2 

A601 

4 

101 

W-101 

L-101 

SIM 

SIM 

SIM 

3 

1 

A101 

SIM 

FIBER BOARD OR 

RIGID INSULATION 

PLASTER, GYPSUM 

WALL BOARD, 

MORTAR, OR 

PARTICLE BOARD 

FINISHED WOOD 

ROUGH WOOD 

PLYWOOD 

STEEL OR IRON 

ALUMINUM 

DETAIL/ SECTION NUMBER 

SIMILAR INDICATION 

SHEET NUMBER 

ELEVATION NUMBER 

SHEET NUMBER 

ELEVATION NUMBER 

SHEET NUMBER 

PLAN OR DETAIL NUMBER 

SHEET NUMBER 

DOOR OR BORROWED LIGHT NUMBER 

WINDOW NUMBER 

LOUVER NUMBER 

ROOM NAME 

ROOM NUMBER 

FLOOR ELEVATION 

NEW COLUMN 

EXISTING 

COLUMN 

MATCH LINE 

REVISION 

NORTH ARROW 

ARCHITECTURE / INTERIORS SYMBOLS 

PARTITION CONFIGURATION 

FA 

2 4 "A" INDICATES SOUNDBATT INSULATION 

FRAMING SIZE DESIGNATION 

FIRE-RATING/ PARTITION 

HEIGHT DESIGNATION 

1. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL PROVISIONS OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS FURNISHED BY PWD. 

2. CONTRACTOR SHALL AT ALL TIMES RETAIN AN APPROVED SET OF PERMIT DRAWINGS ON THE 

CONSTRUCTION PREMISE. 

3. CONSTRICTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING TRADE PERMITS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK AS 

REQUIRED. 

4. CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FACILITY’S RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR WORKING HOURS, 

DELIVERY AND HANDLING OF MATERIAL, AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE REMOVAL. 

5. DO NOT SHORE OR HANDLE ANY CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL IN THE PATH TO EGRESS UNDER ANY 

CIRCUMSTANCES. 

6. DURING CONSTRUCTION PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING OUTSIDE OF THE SCOPE OF WORK SHALL REMAIN 

OCCUPIED AND OPERATIONAL. OCCUPIED PORTIONS OF THE STRUCTURE WILL BE SEPARATED FROM 

PORTIONS OF THE STRUCTURE UNDERGOING ALTERATION, CONSTRUCTION, OR DEMOLITION OPERATIONS 

BY TEMPORARY WALLS WITH A MINIMUM 1-HR FIRE RESISTANCE RATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 241 § 

8.6.2. OPENINGS WILL HAVE AT LEAST A 45-MINUTE FIRE PROTECTION RATING. 

7. EXTREME CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED IN CUTTING, DRILLING OR ANCHORING TO THE EXISTING STRUCTURE. 

IF ANY DETERIORATION OR DAMAGE TO THE EXISTING STRUCTURE OCCURS DURING CONSTRUCTION, IT 

SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY REPORTED TO PWD AND ARCHITECT-ENGINEER OF THE RECORD. 

8. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SCHEDULING ALL CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION WITH 

APPROPRIATE CODE OFFICER DURING CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED. 

9. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TEMPORARY SHORING, SUPPORT AND PROTECTION OF EXISTING 

CONDITIONS TO REMAIN DURING CONSTRUCTION. 

10.CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING SAFE WORK ENVIRONMENT AND COMPLIANCE WITH OSHA 

SAFETY STANDARD DURING CONSTRUCTION. 

11.CONSTRICTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH PWD FOR TEMPORARY SHUT DOWN OF ANY BUILDING SYSTEM 

DURING CONSTRUCTION. 

12.REMOVE ANY NAILS, SCREWS, SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAY, HARDWARE, NON-FUNCTIONING ELECTRICAL 

DEVICES AND OTHER EXPOSED ITEMS ON EXISTING WALLS/PORTIONS IN THE AREA OF NEW WORK. 

13. PATCH AND REPAIR RESULTING WALL/PARTITION DAMAGE AS REQUIRED PREPARING SURFACES TO 

RECEIVE NEW FINISHES AS SCHEDULED. 

14.CONTRACTOR SHALL AT ALL TIMES KEEP THE PREMISE CLEAN AND FREE OF ACCUMULATIONS OF WASTE 

MATERIAL AND RUBBISH CAUSED BY THE CONSTRUCTION. 

15.MANUFACTURER NAMES AND PRODUCT ARE INDICATING ON DRAWINGS TO INDICATE MINIMUM 

PERFORMANCE CRITERIA. EQUALS OR COMPARABLE MAY BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW DURING THE 

SUBMITTAL PROCESS. 

16.CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE CONSTRUCTION PHASING WITH PWD PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF 

ANY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. 

17. ALL DIMENSIONS FOR NEW WALLS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED PARTITIONS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 

18.ALL DIMENSIONS FOR NEW INTERIOR DOORS ARE TO THE CENTER OF DOORS, UNLESS OTHERWISE 

NOTED. 

SHEET NOTE SYMBOLS 2 

KEYNOTE 

W 

TOILET ACCESSORY 

WALL PROTECTION 

LEVEL 1 

0'-0" 

0 

2 

1 / A103 

1 / A102 

N 

S 

1 

E 

2 

TA-10 

CG-1 

CR-1 

HR-1 

LEVEL DESCRIPTION 

LEVEL ELEVATION 

NEW COLUMN GRID 

INDICATOR 

NEW COLUMN GRID 

LINE 

EXISTING COLUMN 

GRID INDICATOR 

EXISTING COLUMN 

GRID LINE 

SHEET NUMBER 

SHEET NUMBER 

MATCH LINE 

REVISION NUMBER 

(SHEET SPECIFIC) 

CLOUDED AREA OF 

REVISION 

PLAN NORTH 

TRUE NORTH 

SHEET KEY NOTE 

EQUIPMENT KEY NOTE 

TOILET ACCESSORY NUMBER 

CORNER GUARD NUMBER 

CRASH RAIL NUMBER 

HAND RAIL NUMBER 

A 

Ht Size 

PARTITION TYPE PLAN SYMBOL 

SEE SHEET A501 FOR 

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 

W 

N 

S 

E 

Drawing Title 


Date 

Revisions 

Phase 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 



CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

Sheet 

(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 



GENERAL NOTES, 

ABBREVIATIONS & SYMBOLS 

Number 

DRP Author 

TJ Checker 

G102 


1:1

SALVAGE 4 SECTIONS OF 

EXISTING BICYCLE RACK. STORE 

FOR REUSE. SEAL METAL 

SLEEVES WITH LEAN CONCRETE. 

REMOVE EXISTING PLANTER BED 

COMPACT SUB SOIL AND 

PREPARE WITH GRAVEL FOR 

CONCRETE POUR. 

RELOCATE HEALTHY SHRUB TO 

NEARBY GRASSY AREAS PER 

DIRECTION OF CITY'S PROJECT 

MANAGER. 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



NIKA A+E 

MEN'S TOILET 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


COMPLETELY DEMOLISH BASE 

CABINETS, UPPER CABINETS, 

COUNTERTOP & BACKSPLASH. 

SALVAGE, CLEAN AND STORE 

EXISTING EYEWASH AND SINK 

DURING DEMOLITION FOR REUSE 

DURING NEW CONSTRUCTION. 

TEMPORARILY CAP AND PROTECT 

EXISTING PLUMBING. 

COMPLETELY DEMOLISH 

BASE CABINETS, UPPER 

CABINETS, COUNTERTOP & 

BACKSPLASH. DEMOLISH 

SINK & CAP PLUMBING 

CONNECTION. 

FIRST AID ROOM 

TOILET 

TELECOM ROOM 

MULTIPURPOSE 

ROOM 

8" ± 

8' - 0" 

TICKET 

COUNTER 

DEMOLISH 

EXISTING 

WALL AT 

JAMB 

ADMIN OFFICE 

DEMOLISH 

EXISTING 

WINDOW. 

± 1'-4" 

DEMOLISH PORTION OF CMU AND BRICK 

VENEER WALL TO ACCOMMODATE NEW 

TELLER WINDOW. PROVIDE STRUCTURAL 

LINTEL SUPPORT PRIOR TO DEMOLITION OF 

WALL TO EXPAND ROUGH OPENING FOR 

NEW WINDOW, 

DIMENSION 

TO BRICK / 

CMU 

COURSING 

DEMOLISH EXISTING 

WINDOW & PARTIAL CMU 

AND BRICK VENEER WALL TO 

ACCOMMODATE NEW 

WINDOW SILL HEIGHT @ 34". 

DEMO ALL EXISTING 

MILLWORK, CARPET, 

WINDOW SILL. REFER TO 

ELECTRICAL FOR 

ADDITIONAL DEMOLITION. 

REMOVE & STORE 

EXISTING DOOR FOR 

REUSE. REMOVE 

EXISTING HARDWARE. 

WOMEN'S TOILET 

LOWER (2) SINKS 


REMOVE EXISTING DOOR 

AND ADJUST FRONT TOILET 

PARTITION FOR 32" WIDE 

OUT SWING DOOR. 

SAWCUT TOP COUNTER 

AND DETACH 

SUPPORTS. STORE FOR 

REUSE. 


SHOWER PAN, WOOD 

BENCH AND TOILET 

PARTITION. CAP EXISTING 

FLOOR DRAIN FOR 

REUSE. 

GENERAL NOTES 

1. CONTRACTOR SHALL AT ALL TIMES 

MAINTAIN THE AREA OF 

CONSTRUCTION PER THE SAFE WORK 

ENVIRONMENT STANDARDS OF OSHA 

AND NIOSH. 

2. REMOVE EXISTING MOVABLE 

FURNITURE, ELECTRONICS, AND 

EQUIPMENT FROM THE AREA OF 

CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE WITH 

THE USERS AND CITY'S PROJECT 

MANAGER FOR SAFE STORAGE 

DURING CONSTRUCTION. 

3. IF AESBETOS RESIDUE IS DISCOVERED 

WHILE REMOVING EXISTING FLOORING, 

IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY CITY'S PROJECT 

MANAGER AND ARCHITECT OF 

RECORD. 

4. ALL DEMOLITION DEBRIS SHALL BE 

DISPOSED IN ENVIRONMENTALLY SAFE 

WAY. 

5. PREPARE ALL SURFACES TO RECIEVE 

NEW FINISH AS REQUIRED IN AREA OF 

THE WORK. 

6. COMPLETELY PROTECT MECHANICAL 

DIFFUSER, RETURN AND EXHAUSTS 

FROM CONSTRUCTION DUST DURING 

ENTIRE PERIOD OF CONSTRUCTIONS. 

LEGEND: 

REMOVE EXISTING 

CARPET, UNDERLAYMENT 

AND WALL BASE IN THE 

INDICATED AREAS. 

SAWCUT TOP COUNTER AND DETACH SUPPORTS. 

STORE FOR REUSE. 

TEMPORARILY CAP PLUMBING LINES AT THIS 

LOCATION. REMOVE EXISTING FAUCETS. TYP. OF 2. 

2 W 

E 

3 DEMOLITION PLAN - TOILET AT KIDDIE POOL 3/16" = 1'-0" 

3/16" = 1'-0" 

AD101 



CURTAIN AND ROD 

DEMOLISH EXISTING CMU WALL 

REMOVE EXISTING DOOR 

FRAME AND HARDWARE AT 

KIDDIE-POOL TOILET 

Revisions 

Drawing Title 

SNACK 

BAR 

ADMIN AND BATH HOUSE DEMOLITION PLAN 

1 

3/16" = 1'-0" 

DEMO PLAN 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 




6' - 1" 

Date 

CADD Filename 

REMOVE EXISTING ROLLUP DOOR, 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 

Revit Model 1:1 

S.S. COUNTERTOP AND SUPPORT. 

DEMOLISH MASONARY WALL AT SILL 

Drawn By 

DRP 

TO ACCOMODATE NEW COUNTERTOP 

SILL HEIGHT 34" (GC SHALL REUSE 

N 

Checked By 

AV 

EXISTING S.S COUNTERTOP). 

Sheet Number 

S 

14' - 0" 

18' - 0" 

STORAGE 

EXISTING 

DEMOLITION 

CARPET 

REMOVAL 

CADD Plot Scale

NEW CONCRETE PAVEMENT AT 

PARTIALLY REMOVED PLANTER. 3000 PSI 

CONC. FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING 

PAVEMENT. ALIGN CONTROL JOINTS WITH 

ADJACENT CONC. 

REINSTALL 2 SECTIONS OF 

PREVIOUSLY SALVAGED 

BICYCLE RACK 

EDGE OF EXISTING CURB 


EXISTING LIGHT POLE TO REMAIN 

1 

A406 

6' - 0" 

3' - 0" 

15' - 6" 

2' - 6" 

NEW CONC. PAD FOR 

BICYCLE RACK. FIELD 

LOCATE PER CITY 

MANAGER'S DIRECTION. 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



ADMIN 

BLDG. 

BATH 

HOUSE 

1 

A101 

PLAY 

AREA 

. DN 

NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


SHADE 

CANOPY 

PLANTERS 

2 

A406 

1 

A405 

CONCESSION 

BLDG. 

. DN 

3 

A406 

KIOSK 

LAW 

N 

PAVED 

DECKING 

CANOPY 

PLANTERS 

SPLASH 

PLAY 

POOL 

PICNIC 

CANOPY AND 

FURNITURE 

CANOPY 

LAWN 

PICNIC 

AREA 

MAIN 

POOL 

AREA 

W 

E 

1 SITE PLAN 1" = 15'-0" 

S 

A100 

2 


A101 

PLANTERS 

EXIST. TOILET AT KIDDIE POOL 

PAVED 

DECKING 

Revisions 

Drawing Title 

SITE PLAN 

4 

A406 

LEISURE 

POOL 

GATEWAY 

Phase 

TO GOLF 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 




Date 

CADD Filename 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


Drawn By 

DRP 

WATER 

SLIDE AREA 

N 

Checked By 

AV 

Sheet Number 

CADD Plot Scale

NEW BICYCLE RACK 

2 

A405 

ALL OTHER 

ENTER HERE 

EXISTING ROOF ABOVE 

POLE AND ROPE Q-SYSTEM 


STORAGE 

SEASON TICKET 

HOLDERS / HANDICAP 

PERSONAL ENTRY 

MEN'S 

LOCKER 

MEN'S 

TOILET 

PASSAGE 

5 

A404 

NEW SIGNAGE MOUNT HT 

48" AT BOTTOM 

NEAREST 

ACCESSIBLE 

ENTRANCE AT 

BREEZEWAY 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 

NEW MILLWORK AND 

COUNTER TOP 

MECH ROOM 

ACCOUNTING 

OFFICE 

-EXISTING ROLL-UP 

DOOR ABOVE TO 

REMAIN. 

EXISTING FENCE 

WITH WICKET 

GATE. 

2 

A403 

MEN'S 

SHOWER 



FIRST AID 

ROOM 

TOILET 

TELECOM 

ROOM 

CIRCULATION 

TICKET 

COUNTER 

ADA 

COUNTER 

BREEZE 

WAY 

JANITOR 

CLOSET 

1 

A402 

NIKA A+E 

CPT-1 NEW CARPET 

FLOORING. 

MULTIPURPOSE 

ROOM 

NEW MILLWORK 

AND COUNTER 

TOP 

1 

A401 

ADMIN 

OFFICE 

1 

A501 

1 

A403 

TOILET 

WOMEN'S 

SHOWER 

1 

A404 

WOMEN'S 

SHOWER 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


PLAY 

AREA 



STORAGE 

WOMEN'S 

LOCKERS 

WOMEN'S 

DRESSING 

4 

A402 

PASSAGE 

STORAGE 

NEW SIGNAGE MOUNT HT 48" 

AT BOTTOM 

NEAREST 

ACCESSIBLE 

ENTRANCE AT 

BREEZEWAY 

SNACK 

BAR 

ADA COUNTER 

1 

A405 

1 NEW WORK PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" 


PROVIDE NEW OUT SWING DOOR 

LIKE AND KING OF PREVIOUSLY 

REMOVED EXISTING DOOR. 

PROVIDE NEW HOLLOW METAL 

FRAME. PAINT DOOR AND FRAME 

TO MATCH EXISTING HARDWARE 

TO MATCH RESTROOM FUNCTION. 

PROVIDE ADA COMPLIANT LEVER 

HANDLE. 

Revisions 

Drawing Title 

NEW WORK FLOOR PLAN 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 

N 

2 NEW WORK PLAN - TOILET AT KIDDIE POOL 3/16" = 1'-0" 

W 

E 

S 



Date 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

Sheet 

Number 

DRP 

AV 

A101 


1:1

3 

A501 

8' - 0" 

2' - 11 1/2" 2' - 1 1/4" 2' - 11 1/4" 

COMPUTER MONITOR 

WITH WALL MOUNTED 

SWIVEL ARM BY 

OTHER 

KEY 

SSM1 

PT-1 

PT-2 

ACT-1 

DESCRIPTION 

SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 

PAINT - WALL 

PAINT - ACCENT WALL 

CEILING TILE 

MANUFACTURER 

DUPONT 

SHERWIN WILLIAMS 

SHERWIN WILLIAMS 

ARMSTRONG 

MODEL 

FINISH LEGEND 

TERRA COLECTION (CORIAN ) 

N/A 

N/A 

ULTIMA 1912 HRC 

COLOR 

AZURITE 

SW 0053 PORCELAIN 

SW 6515 LEISURE BLUE 

WHITE 

FINISH 

N/A 

SEMI-GLOSS 

SEMI-GLOSS 

N/A 

SIZE 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

2' x 4' 

LEGEND 

COMMENTS 

FINAL SELECTION TO BE APPROVED BY OWNER 




FURNITURE LEGEND ?# 

KEYNOTE # 

DESCRIPTION 

1 HAWORTH, VERY TASK CHAIR 

2 HAWORTH, VERY STOOL CHAIR 

BULLETIN 

BOARD 

GROMMET 

WALL MTD. 

PHONE 

4 1/2" 

RP 

COMPUTER 

MONITOR WITH 

WALL MOUNTED 

SWIVEL ARM BY 

OTHER 

1' - 2" 

5 

2 

3 

4 

A401 

REFER TO ELECTRICAL FOR 

ELECTRICAL, DATA AND 

TELECOM HOOK-UP POINTS. 

2 

2 

CASH 

DRAWER, 

BELOW 

1 

COMPUTER 

MONITOR BY 

OTHER 

6' - 6" 

2 

A501 

RP 

PHONE 

RP 

1' - 6" 

GROMMET 

4 1/2" 

2' - 8" 2' - 8" 

± 2' - 6" 

5' - 4" 

BULLETIN 

BOARD 

GROMMET 

SHELF 

ABOVE 

PL-1 

RB-1 

CPT-1 

FORMICA - MILLWORK CABINETS 

RESILENT WALL BASE 

FLOORING - CARPET 

TELLER SECTION 

WITH DEAL TRAY & 

SPEAK-THRU 

SSM TRANSACTION 

COUNTER WITH 

SUPPORTING 

BRACKET, AS 

SCHEDULED 

SSM COUNTERTOP, 

AS SCHEDULED 

CASH DRAWER 

MOUNTED TO 

COUNTER BELOW 

FORMICA 

JOHNSONITE 

(PER OWNER'S SAMPLE) 

3 

A501 

OILED OLIVEWOOD - 5481-43 

PRIMINUM EDGE - RUBBER 

AQUATICS SELECTION-LOW PLY 

8' - 0" 

ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE 

2' - 11 1/2" 2' - 1 1/4" 2' - 11 1/2" 

OILED OLIVEDWOOD 

CB-86 

COLOR 5 (NAVY BLUE) 

3' - 10" 

ARTISAN FINISH 

Name Floor Finish Wall Finish Ceiling Finish Base Finish Room Wall East Room Wall North Room Wall South Room Wall West Casework Lower Casework Surface Casework Upper Remarks 

TICKET COUNTER CPT-1/CPT-2 PNT ACT-1 RB-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-2 PT-1 PL-1 SSM-1 PL-1 

FIRST AID ROOM EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING PL-1 SSM-1 PL-1 

MULTIPURPOSE ROOM EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING EXISTING PL-1 SSM-1 PL-1 

N/A 

N/A 

N/A 

4" (TALL) 

TBD 

NEW SLIDING WINDOW UNIT 

ANODIZED ALUMINUM 

CONSTRUCTION WITH 

POLYCARBONATE RESIN 

THERMOPLASTIC(EXAMPLE - 

LEXAN) GLAZING 

TELLER WINDOW 

WITH DEAL TRAY & 

SPEAK-THRU 

SSM 

COUNTERTOP, AS 

SCHEDULED 

SSM 

TRANSACTION 

COUNTER, AS 

SCHEDULED 




2 

A501 

BULLETIN 

BOARD 

5' - 4" 

2' - 8" 2' - 8" 

4' - 6" 

EXISTING EQUIPMENT 

BOX BY OTHER 

PLAM SHELF, AS 

SCHEDULED 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


PLAM SHELF, AS 

SCHEDULED 

OPEN FACE 

CUBBIE UNIT.PLAM 

-OUTSIDE, OAK 

TRIM ON FRONT. 

PAINTED 

PLYWOOD INSIDE 

FRAMING AND 

BACKING BOARD. 

ADJUSTABLE 

METAL SHELVING 

SUBDIVISIONS. 

PROVIDE 

BLOCKING IN WALL 

AS REQUIRED. 

SSM COUNTERTOP, 

AS SCHEDULED 

CASH DRAWER 

MOUNTED TO 

COUNTER BELOW 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

4' - 11" 

1' - 0" 1' - 9" 10 1/2" 1' - 3 1/2" 

1' - 5" 1' - 9" 1' - 9" 

10" 1' - 4 1/2" 1' - 7 1/2" 8" 

PLY BACKING BOARD 

NO 

BACKING 

4' - 6" 

NO BACKING IN 

BOTTOM CUBBIES 

PLAM BASE 

CABINETS WITH 

ADJUSTABLE 

SHELVES, AS 

SCHEDULED 

2' - 10" 

7' - 4" 

± 8' - 7 1/2" 

EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN 

PLAM BASE CABINET, 

AS SCHEDULED 

OPEN 

BEYO 

ND 

4' - 0" 

3' - 3" 

2' - 10 3/4" 

1' - 3" 

BULLETION BOARD 

3' - 6" 

± 8' - 7 1/2" 

2' - 10" 

EXISTING CEILING TO REMAIN 

3' - 6" 

SSM TRANSACTION 

COUNTER, AS 

SCHEDULED 

2' - 7 1/2" 1' - 6" 

CASH DRAWER 

MOUNTED TO 

COUNTER BELOW 

PLAM BASE 

CABINET, AS 

SCHEDULED 

8 

A401 

+/- 1' - 6" 1' - 3" 

2 NORTH MILLWORK ELEVATION 10 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

A401 

3 

EAST MILLWORK ELEVATION 

GYP BOARD BULKHEAD 

EXISTING TO REMAIN 

1' - 7 1/2" 2' - 6" 

2' - 10" 

6' - 11 1/2" 

2' - 10" 

GENERAL NOTES 

1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 

DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS. 

2. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY 

ALL DIMENSIONS.. 

3. CABINET HARDWARE SHALL BE 

HEAVY DUTY COMMERCIAL GRADE. 

1 ENLARGED TICKET COUNTER PLAN 1/2" = 1'-0" 

8' - 8" 

6' - 11 1/2" 

EXISTING SINK / EYE WASH 

STATION TO BE 

REINSTALLED IN NEW 

CASEWORK 

EXISTING CEILING TO 

5 WEST MILLWORK ELEVATION 2' - 0" 

2' - 6" 1' - 0" 

REMAIN 

9 

A401 

FIRST AID ROOM MILLWORK ELEVATION 

EXISTING BULKHEAD 

6 


1/2" = 1'-0" 

TO REMAIN 

GWB SOFFIT WHERE 

GWB SOFFIT WHERE 

PLAM WALL 

CABINETS WITH 

UPPER CABINET, WHERE 

OCCURS, SEE 

OCCURS, SEE 

SCRIBE COUNTERTOP 

2' - 1" 

1' - 3" 

ADJUSTABLE 

OCCURS, SEE ELEVATION 

ELEVATIONS 

1' - 3" 

ELEVATIONS 

TO WALL WHERE BACK 

SHELVES, AS 

U.N.O. 

SPLASH DOES NOT 

CEILING 

CEILING 

SCHEDULED 

SLIDING DRAWER, 

CABINET HINGES AS 

OCCUR 

BACK SPLASH, 

8'-8" 

8'-8" 

HARDWARE AS 

SPECIFIED, TYP. 

WHERE OCCURS, SPECIFIED 

SCRIBED FILLER 

PLAM. BASE 

MATCH COUNTER 

ATTACH TO 

ATTACH TO 

PANEL, MATCH 

ATTACH TO 

DRAWER INTERIOR, 

CABINETS WITH 

FINISH 

CONCEALED IN-WALL 

CONCEALED 

CABINET FINISH 

CONCEALED IN-WALL 

FINISH AS SPECIFIED HORIZONTAL 

ADJUSTABLE HORIZONTAL IN- 

AT GWB SOFFIT 

HORIZONTAL 

Revisions 

BACKING AS 

SHELVES, AS 

BACKING AS 

WALL BACKING AS 

REQUIRED 

9 

SCHEDULED 

REQUIRED 

REQUIRED 

BOTTOM OF 

BOTTOM OF 

Drawing Title 

6'-11 SOFFIT 1/2" 

6'-11 SOFFIT 1/2" 

A401 

SOLID SURFACE 

SHELVING SUPPORT 

SSM 

COUNTER 

SHELVING SUPPORT 

STANDARDS AS 

SCRIBED FILLER 

COUNTERTOP & 

STANDARDS AS 

SPECIFIED 

PANEL, MATCH 

BACKSPLASH, AS 

SCHEDULED 

SHELVING STANDARDS, 

SPECIFIED 

CABINET FINISH 

Phase 

ADJUSTABLE SHELF, 

SUPPORT AS SPECIFIED 

AT GWB SOFFIT 

MATERIALS AS 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 

PULLS, AS ADJUSTABLE SHELF, 

FILLER 

SPECIFIED 

SPECIFIED MATERIALS AS 


PANEL, AS 


SPECIFIED 




REQUIRED 

MATERIALS AS 

MATERIALS AS 

Date 

CADD Filename 

SPECIFIED 

SPECIFIED 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


Drawn By 

INTERIOR SURFACES 

DRP 

AS SPECIFIED 

2' - 6" 

3' - 0" 

3' - 0" 

N 

Checked By 

AV 

VALANCE/ 

VALANCE/ 

PULLS, AS 

8' - 6" 

STOP, TYP. 

STOP, TYP. 

SPECIFIED 

Sheet Number 

SCHEDULED BASE 

W 

E 

A401 

7 MULTIPURPOSE ROOM MILLWORK 1/2" = 1'-0" 

8 DETAIL - BASE CASEWORK SECTION DETAIL - UPPER CASEWORK WITH SELF SECTION 

DETAIL - UPPER CASEWORK SECTION 

9 10 

1" = 1'-0" 

1" = 1'-0" 

1" = 1'-0" 

S 

2' - 6" ± 1' - 8 1/2" 

1' - 5 1/2" 

3' - 0" 

4 SOUTH MILLWORK ELEVATION 1/2" = 1'-0" 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

0' - 6" 

1' - 10 1/2" 

0' - 1 1/2" 

0' - 4" 

0' - 4" 

0' - 2 1/2" 

2' - 6" 

U.N.O. 

0' - 0 1/2" 

0' - 2 1/2" 

2' - 6" 

U.N.O. 

ENLARGED NEW WORK PLAN 

& ELEVATIONS - ADMIN AREA 

CADD Plot Scale

3 

A402 

2 

A402 

SOAP DISPENSER 

A402 

5 Sim 

ADD NEW ANGLE BRACING 

SAW CUT COUNTER 

& BACK SPLASH 



EXISTING MIRROR 

TO REMAIN 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 

1' - 1" 1' - 1" 


LOWER SINK 

COUNTER & 

FRAMING 

NEW 2 X 4 ANGLE 

SUPPORT AT 

CMU 

4' - 8 3/4" +/_ 

V.I.F. 

NEW MIRROR STRIP INFILL 

NOTE: 

INFILL VOID W/ 

SOLID SURFACE 

MAT'L TO MATCH 

COUNTER SINK 




4 

NEW FLOOR PLAN- WOMEN'S SINK 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

CHANGE OUT EXISTING FAUCET- ADD (1) NEW 

GOOSENECK FAUCET W/ WRIST BLADES 

CHANGE OUT EXISTING FAUCETS- ADD (2) NEW 

GOOSENECK FAUCETS W/ WRIST BLADES 

1/2" = 1'-0" 


CHANGE OUT EXISTING 

FAUCETS- ADD (2) NEW 

GOOSENECK FAUCETS 

W/ WRIST BLADES 

EXISTING 

3 

MIRROR 

A402 

TO REMAIN 

EXISTING MIRROR 

TO REMAIN 

ADD (2) GOOSENECK 

FAUCETS W/ WRIST 

BLADES FOR 

CHILDREN'S SINKS (AS 

SAW CUT 

MFR'D BY --- OR 

ADD NEW 

COUNTER 

APPROVED EQUAL) 

ANGLE 

& BACK SPLASH 

BRACING 

SAW CUT 

A402 5 

ADD (1) 

COUNTER APRON 

GOOSENECK 

FOR WHEELCHAIR 

FAUCET W/ WRIST 

CLEARANCE 

BLADES 

CHANGE OUT 

EXISTING FAUCET- 

ADD (1) NEW 

ADD P.TRAP 

GOOSENECK FAUCET 

PROTECTION 

W/ WRIST BLADES 

WRAP TO ALL 

SINKS 

2 

A402 


ADD P.TRAP 

LOWER COUNTER 

PROTECTION WRAP 

SINK AND SUPPORT 

AT ALL SINKS 

FRAMING AS REQ'D 

1 NEW FLOOR PLAN- MEN'S SINK 

1/2" = 1'-0" 


1' - 1" 1' - 1" 

6" 

27" MIN. 

± 34" MAX 

ETR 

SAWCUT FRONT 

APRON FOR 

WHEELCHAIR 

CLEARANCE 

EXISTING PLUMBING 

PIPES. ADD P.TRAP 

PROTECTION WRAP 

AT ALL SINKS. 

5 

± 31" MAX 

TYPICAL SINK ELEVATION 

2 ADULT ADA SINK 1" = 1'-0" 

1" = 1'-0" 

31" MAX 

27" MIN. 2" 4" ±3" 


OR RELOCATION AS 

REQ. 

NEW ANGLE BRACE 

TO MATCH EXISTING 

PAINT AS REQ. 

PAINT EXPOSED CMU FULL WIDTH OF LOWER SINK AREA 

± 34" MAX 

ETR 

PAINT CMU 


3 CHILDREN'S ADA SINK N 

Checked By 

CS AV 

ANCHOR 

Revisions 

/ EXP. 

Drawing Title 

BOLT AS 

REQD. 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 


LEGEND: 



EXISTING 

Date 

CADD Filename 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


NEW WORK 

Drawn By KR AV 

W 

S 

E 

NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


Sheet 

(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 



AND ELEVATIONS - ADA SINKS 

Number 

A402 

CADD Plot Scale

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



MAKE DOOR SWING 

IN OUTWARD 

DIRECTION 

MEN'S TOILET 

NEW 32" WIDE STALL 

DOOR. MAKE DOOR 

SWING IN OUTWARD 

DIRECTION 

ADD 42" GRAB 

BAR AS MRF BY 

BOBRICK OR 

APPROVED 

EQUAL 

NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


4' - 11 1/2" +/- 

2' - 7" +/- 

2' - 6" +/- 2' - 7" +/- 

2' - 7" 

2' - 7 1/4" +/- 

2' - 9 1/2" +/- 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

2 

NEW FLOOR PLAN- MEN'S TOILETS 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

ADD 42" GRAB 

BAR AS MRF BY 

BOBRICK OR 

APPROVED 

EQUAL 

LEGEND: 

EXISTING 

NEW WORK 

1 NEW FLOOR PLAN- WOMEN'S TOILETS W 

E 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

4' - 10 1/2" +/- 

2' - 8" +/- 

2' - 6" +/- 

2' - 6 1/2" +/- 2' - 6 1/4" +/- 

2' - 7" +/- 

2' - 8" +/- 

2' - 9 3/4" +/- 


EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

EXIST. 

TOILET 

NEW 32" WIDE STALL 

DOOR. MAKE DOOR 

SWING IN OUTWARD 

DIRECTION 

MAKE DOOR SWING IN 

OUTWARD DIRECTION 

WOMEN'S 

SHOWER 

Revisions 

Drawing Title 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 




Date 

CADD Filename 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


Drawn By KR DRP 

N 

Checked By 

CS AV 

Sheet Number 

S 


AND ELEVATIONS - ADA 

TOILETS 

A403 

CADD Plot Scale

PRIVACY PARTITION 

AND 36" WIDE STALL 

DOOR. PROVIDE ADA 

COMPUTABLE LEVER 

HANDLE AND 

THUMBTURN 

ADD 36" 

GRAB BAR 

NOTE: DEMO SHOWER 

CURB & DRAIN PAN TO 

LIMITS INDICATED 

SEE PLAN 

ADD B-518 FOLD 

UP BOBRICK 

SHOWER SEAT 

MEN'S ADA 

CHANGING 

ROOM 

NEW ADA B-518 

BOBRICK FOLD UP 

SHOWER SEAT 

(360LB MAX) 

5' - 2" ± (V) 

ADD BULL NOSE 

TILE FULL WIDTH 

SHOWER 

REPLACE 2"x2" 

TILE TO MATCH 

EXISTING 

8" 

± 3" 

ADD NEW SHOWER DRAIN 

HUB TO MATCH EXISTING & 

TIE INTO EXISTING DRAIN 

LINE 

ADD NEW FLOOR DRAINTO 

MATCH EXISTING BY JOSAM 

OR APPROVED EQUAL. 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 

1' - 6" 

ADA 36" GRAB BAR 

ADA 42" GRAB BAR 

EXISTING SLAB ON 

GRADE 

ADD NEW 2"x2" 

SHOWER TILE 

TO MATCH 

EXISTING 

EXISTING DRAIN 

LINE 

TO REMAIN 

1/4" PER FOOT MIN 

SHOWER SLOPE 



1 1/2" = 1'-0" 

MEN'S SHOWER 

NIKA A+E 

A404 

7 

PRIVACY 

CURTAIN 

MEN'S SHOWER 

EXIST. 

NEW ADA COMPLIANT MOEN TELFORD 

SHOWER HEADS 

Models: 82968 series OR APPROVED EQUAL 

FOR (2) CORNER SHOWERS. 

ADD ADA GRAB 

BARS 

MEN'S SHOWER 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


A404 6 

WALL TO FLOOR 

MOUNTED GRAB 

BAR 

NEW ADA B-518 


SHOWER SEAT 

(360LB MAX) 

MEN'S ADA 

SHOWER 

AREA 

R 2' - 6" 

ADD 24" 

GRAB BARS 

ADD 36" 

GRAB BARS 

ADD STAINLESS STEEL 

PANEL TO MATCH 

48" MAX 

ADA HEIGHT 

2' - 9" 

17"-19" 

SEAT HEIGHT 

NEW MOEN TELFORD 

SINGLE HANDLE SHOWER LEVER 

CONTROLS 

Models: 82968 series 

OR APPROVED EQUAL FOR (2) CORNER 

SHOWERS . 

ADD WALL/FLOOR 

MOUNTED ADA GRAB BAR 

AS MFR BY BOBRICK OR 

APPROVED EQUAL. 

48" MAX 

ADA HEIGHT 

17"-19" 

SEAT HEIGHT 

NEW ADA B-518 BOBRICK 

FOLD UP SHOWER SEAT 

(360LB MAX) 

ADD WALL/FLOOR 

MOUNTED ADA GRAB BAR 

AS MFR BY BOBRICK OR 

APPROVED EQUAL 

5 

NEW FLOOR PLAN- MEN'S ACESSIBLE SHOWER 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

ADD 36" 

GRAB BARS 

ADD 24" GRAB 

BARS 

NEW ADA B-518 


SHOWER SEAT 

(360LB MAX) 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

ADD STAINLESS 

STEEL SHOWER 

CURTAIN ROD 

2 

A404 

EXISTING 

SHOWERHEAD 

EXISTING CMU 

WALL 

WOMEN'S 

SHOWER 

EXISTING SHOWER 

ADD 24" 

HEAD 

GRAB BARS 

ADD SHOWER 

LEVER CONTROL 

SEE PLAN 

TO EXISTING 

ADD SHOWER LEVER 

CONTROL 

NEW ADA B-518 

CONTROL 

ADD GRAB BARS BOBRICK FOLD UP 

WOMEN'S ADA 

SHOWER SEAT 

MOVE SOAP 

SHOWER 

(360LB MAX) 

DISPENSER @ ADA 

HEIGHT 

42" ADA GRAB BAR 

8" 

WOMEN'S 

8 

3 

SHOWER 

A404 

A404 

PRIVACY PARTITION 

EXISTING SLAB ON 

GRADE 

1 NEW FLOOR PLAN- WOMEN'S ACESSIBLE SHOWER WOMEN'S ACCESSABLE SHOWER 

3 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

R 2' - 6" 

8 ENLARGED SHOWER PAN 1/2" = 1'-0" 

6 MEN'S ACCESSABLE SHOWER ELEVATION. 

2 

7 

MEN'S ACCESSABLE SHOWER ELEVATION 

NEW ADA B-518 


SHOWER SEAT 

(360LB MAX) 

1' - 4" 

EXTEND CMU WALL. 

TOOTH WITH EXISTING 

BLOCKS. PAINT TO 

MATCH EXISTING. 

SHOWER PAN N 

Checked By 

4 NEW FLOOR PLAN- WOMEN'S ACESSIBLE DRESSING 3/4" = 1'-0" 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

AV 


NEW 42" GRAB BAR 

NEW 24" GRAB BAR 

WOMEN'S 

DRESSING 

Revisions 

Drawing Title 

PATCH FLOORING AT 

THE LOCATION OF 

PREVIOUSLY REMOVED 

WALL. MATCH WITH 

EXISTING. 

Phase 

NEW PRIVACY CURTAIN TO 

MATCH EXISTING. 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 




Date 

CADD Filename 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


Drawn By 

DRP 

± 3" 

17"-19" 

SEAT HEIGHT 

48" MAX 

ADA HEIGHT 

W 

S 

E 


AND ELEVATIONS - ADA 

SHOWERS 

Sheet 

Number 

A404 

CADD Plot Scale

SNACK 

BAR 

4 

A501 

EXISTING 

COUNTER AND 

ROLLUP SHUTTER 

TO REMAIN 

NEW ROLLUP 

SHUTTER AND 

SLIDER SERVICE 

WINDOW. REFER TO 

DETAIL 3/A501 

NEW SIGNAGE. MOUNT HT. 48" 

AT BOTTOM. 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



6' - 1" 

NEAREST 

ACCESSIBLE 

SERVICE 

NIKA A+E 

LOWER EXISTING 

COUNTER TO ADA 

COMPLIANT HEIGHT. 

REFER TO DETAIL 

3/A501 



4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


1/4" = 1'-0" 

POST AND ROPE Q-SYSTEM BY CROWD CONTROL GEAR OR EQUAL. 

POST - FIXED, MODEL - ST600F, FINISH - SATIN STAINLESS STEEL. 

ROPE - BRAIDED POLYPROPYLENE (843), COLOR - BLACK. 

4' - 2" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 4' - 8" 

DAY PASS PURCHASE ENTRY 

4' - 1" 4' - 1" 

6' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 4' - 8" 

4' - 2" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 4' - 8" 

SEASON TICKET 

HOLDERS / HANDICAP 

PERSONAL ENTRY 

6' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 4' - 8" 

7' - 6" 

7' - 4" 4' - 1" 4' - 1" 

4' - 2" 6' - 0" 6' - 0" 


YELLOW CAUTION 

STRIPE WITH BLACK 

MARKINGS ON EXISTING 

PAVEMENT. 

4' - 11" 

6' - 11" 

6' - 6" 5' - 3" 

5" 

-EXISTING ROLL- 

UP DOOR ABOVE 

TO BE REMAIN. 

7' - 6" 

4' - 7" 

8 3/4" 

BREEZE 

WAY 

HANDICAP 

COUNTER 

6' - 2" 5' - 10" 5' - 5 3/4" 

4" 

OFFSET 

OFFSET ROW OF 

POSTS 4" LEFT 

FROM FENCE 

POST 

NOTE: 

POSTS IN BREEZEWAY 

SHALL BE REMOVABLE 

TYPE. 

POST CROWD CONTROL 

GEAR OR EQUAL. 

POST - REMOVABLE, 

MODEL - ST600R, FINISH - 

SATIN STAINLESS STEEL. 

Drawing Title 

Phase 


Date 


Revisions 

ENLARGED PLANS - SNACK 

BAR & Q-SYSTEM 


CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 


1:1 

2 

1 SNACK BAR PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 

Q-SYSTEM PLAN 

N 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

DRP 

AV 

W 

E 

Sheet 

Number 

A405 

S

A406 

GENERAL NOTES 

A406 8 

Sim 

DN 

5 

Sim 

DN 

1 GATEWAY ONE- PLAN GATEWAY TWO- PLAN 

2 

1/4" = 1'-0" 

1/4" = 1'-0" 

3 

GATEWAY THREE- PLAN 

1/4" = 1'-0" 

9 

A407 

5 

A407 

9 

A407 

SLOPE 

12/12 

SLOPE 

12/12 

SLOPE SLOPE 

12/12 12/12 

5 

A407 

Sim 

5 

A406 

9 

A407 

Sim 

DN 

8 

Sim 

6 

DN 

A406 

9 ARCH SECTION @ ENTRY GATE 1 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

ROOF TRUSS 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

A406 

4" 3' - 0" 3/4" 3' - 11 1/4" 1' - 4" 6' - 3" 5' - 0 1/4" 

12 

12 

1' - 10" 

2' - 0" 

R 3' - 0" 

A407 

6' - 0" 

BOARDWALK 

FRIES* 

and GRILL 

NEW EIFS 

ROOF TRUSS 

10 

A406 

11 

A406 

GATEWAY 

THREE 

SIGNAGE 

GATEWAY 

FOUR 

SIGNAGE 

4" 4' - 6" 3/4" 3' - 11 1/4" 1' - 4" 6' - 2 3/4" 5' - 0 1/4" 

6" LETTERING 

10 GATEWAY THREE- SIGNAGE 1/2" = 1'-0" 

12 

12 

1' - 10" 

2' - 0" 

1. REMOVE EXISTING DIRECT APPLIED 

6" LETTERING 

TO 

G O L F 

11 GATEWAY FOUR SIGNAGE 

R 3' - 0" 

1 

A407 

6' - 0" 

GATEWAY 

4 GATEWAY FOUR AND FIVE- PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 

5 ARCH ELEVATION TYPICAL 6 ARCH ELEVATION @ BATH HOUSE SOUTH ARCH ELEVATION @ ENTRY GATE 

8 

3/8" = 1'-0" 

3/8" = 1'-0" 

3/8" = 1'-0" 

EXT. COATING 

SYSTEM ON 1/2" 

EXT. CEMENT 

BOARD 

CLOCK 

6' - 5" 

19'-11" TO GRADE 

8'-8" TO GRADE 

1' - 4" 

R 3' - 0" 

EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM (DEFS) AT ALL 

GABLES. 

2. REMOVE EXISTING CEMENT BOARD 

BACKING AT ALL GABLES. 

3. EXAMINE PLYWOOD CONDITION FOR 

MOISTURE, UNEVEN SURFACE, PEEL OFF 

LAYERS, AND CORROSION IN FASTENERS. 

4. COORDINATE A FIELD VISIT WITH THE 

CITY’S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AND THE 

ARCHITECT TO DETERMINE EXTENT OF 

DAMAGE AT PLYWOOD AND TRUSS 

FRAMING. 

5. PER THE DIRECTION FROM ARCHITECT, 

REMOVE THE EXISTING PLYWOOD 

SHEATHING WHERE SIGNIFICANT DAMAGE 

IS DETECTED. IF THE PLYWOOD IS FOUND 

TO BE NOT USABLE THEN THE ENTIRE 

SHEATHING MAY REQUIRED TO BE 

REPLACED. 

6. PATCH AND REPLACE PLYWOOD AS WELL 

AS FRAMING AS REQUIRED. 

7. INSTALL RAKE FLASHING AND DIVERTER 

FLASHING. 

8. ALL ROOFING PATCHWORK SHALL BE 

PERFORMED BY A QUALIFIED ROOFING 

INSTALLER. WORK PERFORMED UNDER 

THIS CONTRACT SHALL NOT VIOLATE THE 

EXISTING WARRANTY ON THE ROOFING. 

CURRENT WARRANTY ON ROOFING WILL 

BE CONTINUED AT THE COMPLETION OF 

GABLE WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE 

FULLY LIABLE FOR FUTURE LEAKS, AND 

DAMAGE AS IMPLEMENTED BY THE 

WARRANTY IN THE AREAS OF WORK 

PERFORMED. 

9. PREPARE MOCKUP SAMPLES OF EIFS WITH 

PIGMENTED FINISH FOR THE INSPECTION 

OF THE CITY’S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 

AND THE ARCHITECT OF THE RECORD. 

10.INSTALL EXTERIOR INSULATED FINISH 

SYSTEM (EIFS) IN COMPLIANCE WITH ASTM 

1396, AND MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION 

INSTRUCTIONS. ALL EIFS WORK SHALL BE 

WARRANTED PER THE MANUFACTURER’S 

STANDARD WARRANTY OF 10 YEARS. 

11.EIFS WORK SHALL BE INSPECTED AND 

CERTIFIED BY A QUALIFIED EIFS 

INSPECTOR. 

12.INSTALL CAP FLASHING AT ALL GABLES. 

13.INSTALL LETTERING ASD SIGNAGE ON THE 

GABLES WHERE APPLICABLE. 

14.INSTALL CLOCK ON THE GABLE 2. 

9 

A406 

14'-0" MAS BEARING 

W 

N 

S 

E 

NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


Drawing Title 

Phase 


Date 

Revisions 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 




CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

Sheet 

(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 




Number 

KB 

AV 

A406 


1:1

0' - 6" 

2 

A407 

METAL FLASHING 

SLOPE 

ALUMINUM COPING. 

COLOR TO MATCH 

EIFS 

EXISTING 

FRAMING 

EIFS FINISH COAT 

EXISTING FRAMING 

4 

A407 

OH 

19' - 11" 

1' - 4" 

4" 3' - 0" 4' - 0" 

4 

A407 

3/4" ALL AROUND 

3/4" ALL AROUND 

EXISTING EXTERIOR COATING ON 

1/2" EXT. CEMENT BD. TO CLAD 

STEEL BEAM 

PLYWOOD 

EXISTING REINFORCED 

CONCRETE COLUMN ABOVE 

ROUNDED 

METAL "U" MOLD 

3 

A407 


EXTENT OF NEW EIFS 

24" DIA. REINFORCED 

CONCRETE COLUMN TO 

HEIGHT INDICATED 

FIBERGLASS ASPHALT 

SHINGLES OVER 15# 

ROOF FELT ON 1/2" EXT 

PLYWOOD 

PREFABIRCATED 

WOOD ROOF TRUSS 

EXTERIOR GYP. 

BOARD SOFFIT 

BOARD 

4" 3' - 0" 3/4" 3' - 11 1/4" 1' - 4" 11' - 3" 

EXISTING SHINGLE 

ROOFING. PATCH 

AS REQUIRED 

12" = 1'-0" 

12 

1' - 10" 

2' - 0" 

12 

3" 

SEALANT 

ALUM. FLASHING 

COLOR TO MATCH 

EIFS 

1 NEW ARCH SECTION NEW ARCH STRUCTURE 

2 

1" = 1'-0" 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

6' - 0" 

SEALANT 

3" 

EXTENT OF 

NEW EIFS 

ROOF GABLE 

TRUSS/ 

FRAMING 

1/2" 

4" 

TREATED NAILER 

LIQUID APPLIED 

MEMBRANE 

1" EPS 

FOAM 

WATER RESISTANT PLYWOOD 

SHEATHING. THICKNESS TO 

MATCH EXISTING. COAT WITH EIFS TYPICAL DETAIL 

7 9 GABLE VENT DETAIL LIQUID VAPOR BARRIER 

3" = 1'-0" 

3" = 1'-0" 

CAMPATABLE WITH EIFS 

SYSTEM 

1/8" EIFS COMMERCIAL 

CEMENT BASE AND MESH 

1" EPS EPS FOAM 

NIKA A+E 

ADHESIVELY ATTACHED 

451 HUNGERFORD DRIVE (P)301.770.3520 

EXTERIOR GRADE 

EIFS BASE COAT 

4TH FLOOR 

(F)301.770.3521 

(EXPOSURE 1) WATER 

ROCKVILLE, MD 20850 www.nika-ae.com 

EIFS FINISH OVER 

RESISTANMT PLYWOOD. 

RIGID INSULATION 

THICKNESS TO MATCH 

MEDIUM WEIGHT FIBER 

EXISTING 

GLASS MESH EMBED OVER 




MEMBRANE 

DRAINAGE STRIP ADHERED 

WRAP DRYVIT DETAIL 

WITH DABS OF AP ADHESIVE 

MESH 2" MIN AT 

(ENSURE BOTTOM EDGE OF 

BACKSIDE OF EPS 

DRAINAGE STRIP IS LEFT FREE 

TO DRAIN ) 

EXISTING 

FRAMING 

ROUNDED MTL "U" MOLD 


EXISTING 

CONCRETE 

1/4" ± OPEN FOR DRINAGE 

BLOCKING OR 

COLUMN 

STRUCTURAL SUBSTRATE 

AS REQUIRED 

EIFS COMPATABLE 

EIFS DRAINING 

4 

SEALANT AND BOND 

6" = 1'-0" 

BREAKER TAPE 

PIPE SLEVE SET 

IN SEALANT 

EIFS COMMERCIAL 

CEMENT PLASTER BASE 

SCREW OR BOLT ATTACHMENT TO 

BUILDING FRAMING OR STRUCTURAL 

EIFS FINISH OVER 

SUBSTRATE 

EIFS PRIMER 

BEARING WASHER 

CLEAT FOR CLOCK 

PLYWOOD SHEATHING 

OR SIGNAGE 

FLASHING 


CLOCK CONNECTION DETAIL 2 

SEALAN 

6 

3/16" = 1'-0" 

T 

2 3/4" 

WATER TIGHT 

DIVERTER 

CLOCK CLEAT, HANGS 

WALL CLEAT 24" 

SEAMS 

Revisions 

OVER WALL CLEAT 

LONG LOCATE 10 

(TYPICAL) 

Drawing Title 

1/2" BELOW TOP 

OF CLOCK 


110 DEGREES 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 




Date 

CADD Filename 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


Drawn By 

KB 

ALUMINUM BODY 

POWDER COATED 

DIVERTER FLASHING 

Checked By 

AV 

BRONZE 

1/2" SEALTITE WHIP CONNECT TO 

CLOCK WEIGHS 23 

THREE-POSITION SWITCH FOR 

Sheet Number 

LBS 

MOVEMENT POWER/CONTROL 

3 WIRES, 14GA, 120V, 3 WATTS 

KICK OUT FLASHING 

A407 

8 CLOCK DETAIL 5 

3/4" = 1'-0" 

3' - 0" 

10 1/2" 

0' - 3" 

MEDIUM WEIGHT FIBER 

GLASS MESH EMBED OVER 




ADHESIVELY 

ATTACHED 


MEMBRANE 


(EXPOSURE 1) WATER 

RESISTANMT PLYWOOD. 

THICKNESS TO MATCH 

EXISTING 

1'-0" 

0' - 6" 


MEMBRANE 

GABLE INTERIOR 


(EXPOSURE 1) 

WATER 

RESISTANMT 

PLYWOOD. 

THICKNESS TO 

MATCH EXISTING 



ADHESIVELY 

ATTACHED 

12' x 6" 

VENTILATION 

GRILLE 

ATTICK 

MEDIUM WEIGHT 

FIBER GLASS MESH 

EMBED OVER EIFS 

BASE COAT 


2" MIN 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 




3 METAL COPING DETAIL 1" = 1'-0"

8' - 0" 

NEW 1/2' PVC CONDUIT, SURFACE 

MOUNTED ELEC. JUNCTION BOX AND 

SS FACE PLATE FOR FUTURE USE. 

SEE DETAILS 2,3 ON THIS SHEET FOR 

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 

2' - 7 1/4" 

0' - 4 1/2" 

2' - 0" 

0' - 8" 

0' - 6 1/4" 

2' - 0" 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 

0' - 10 1/2" 

0' - 10 3/4" 

5' - 4" 



0' - 4 1/2" 

NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


GENERAL NOTES 

1 

COUNTER TOP DIMENSIONS 

1/2" = 1'-0" 

2' - 0" 

WALL 

1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 

DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS FOR 

REVIEW PRIOR TO 

COMMENCEMENT WITH ANY SHOP 

FABRICATION OR ORDER. 

2. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE 

RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD 

MEASUREMENTS. 

3. INSTALLATION OF MANUFACTURED 

PRODUCT SHALL BE AS 

RECOMMENDED BY THE 

MANUFACTURER. 

NEW 5/8" GYP. BD. WALL FURRING 

ON EXISTING FURRING CHANNEL 

EXISTING STEEL "L" AND 

PRECAST LINTELS TO REMAIN 

UNDISTURBED DURING 

CONSTRUCTION. 

1 REMOVE EXISTING WALL FINISH 

2 SAW-CUT MASONARY JOINT TO 

A DEPTH OF 6" AND INSTALL A 

TEMPORARY 4"X6"X5/16" "L" 

LINTEL, LENGTH AS REQUIRED. 

3 REMOVE EXISTING MASONRY AT 

WINDOW HEAD AS REQUIRED 

AND WELD A MATCHING "L" TO 

EXISTING SUPPORTING LINTELS, 

LENGTH AS REQUIRED. 

4 REMOVE MASONRY AS 

REQUIRED AT WINDOW JAMB 

TO WIDEN THE WINDOW AS 

SHOWN IN PLAN. 

NEW LIGHT EXITURE AT 

BREEZEWAY. REFER TO 

ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR 

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 

NEW 5/8" PAINTED GYP. BD. WALL 

FURRING ON EXISTING FURRING 

CHANNEL 

EXISTING STEEL LINTEL AND 

MASONRY TO REMAIN 

NEW WINDOW UNIT 

NEW ROLLUP EXTERIOR GRADE 

MECHANICALLY OPERATED SHUTTER. 

PROVIDE ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION 

IN LIKE AND KIND OF EXISTING. 

INSTALL BOX UNIT IN PLACE OF 

PREVIOUSLY REMOVED EXISTING BOX. 

PROVIDE LOCKABKE HASPS AT THE 

BOTTOM OF SHUTTER.-BOTH ENDS. 

NEWSLIDING SCREEN AT SERVICE 

COUNTER. MATCH EXISTING IN 

LIKE AND KIND. FRAME TO BE 

PAINTED TO MATCH EXISTING. 


5 INSTALL NEW WINDOW UNIT 

AND ADA COUNTERTOPS. 

TREATED WOOD FRAMING @ 12' 

O.C. TO SUPPORT COUNTERTOP. 

MECHANICALLY AND ADHESIVELY 

ATTACH TO PERIMETER PLYWOOD 

SUPPORT TO FORM RIGID FRAME. 

PROVIDE ADDITIONAL BRACKET 

SUPPORTS WHERE OVERHANG IS 

GREATER THAN 12" 

2' - 10" 

PROVIDE TREATED WOOD 

BLOCKING AROUND CUT 

FOR MECHANICAL 

FASTENING 

NEW EXTERIOR GRADE 

WATERPROOF COMMERCIAL 

PLYWOOD PERIMETER 

SUPPORT FOR COUNTERTOP. 

TYP. AT ALL EDGES. 

NEW STAINLESS STEEL DEAL 

TREY 

NEW SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP AS 

SCHEDULED. INSTALL PER 

MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 

AND TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS. 

TREATED WOOD FRAMING @ 12' 

O.C. TO SUPPORT COUNTERTOP. 

MECHANICALLY AND ADHESIVELY 

ATTACH TO PERIMETER PLYWOOD 

SUPPORT TO FORM RIGID FRAME. 

PROVIDE ADDITIONAL BRACKET 

SUPPORTS WHERE OVERHANG IS 

GREATER THAN 12" 

INSTALL A NEW 1/2" PVC CONDUIT 

THROUGH EXISTING MASONRY WALL AT 

LOCATIONS INDICATED IN PLAN. 

PROVIDE NEW SURFACE MOUNTED 

JUNCTION BOX AND STAINLESS STEEL 

BLANK FACE PLATE INTERIOR AND 

. EXTERIOR FOR FUTURE USE 

1' - 6" 

3' - 6" 

PROVIDE TREATED WOOD 

BLOCKING AROUND CUT 

FOR MECHANICAL 

FASTENING 

NEW EXTERIOR GRADE 

WATERPROOF COMMERCIAL 

PLYWOOD PERIMETER 

SUPPORT FOR COUNTERTOP. 

TYP. AT ALL EDGES. 

REINSTALL PREVIOUSLY 

REMOVED STAINLESS STEEL 

COUNTERTOP 

1/2" + 3/4" LAYERS OF EXTERIOR 

GRADE COMMERCIAL 

WATERPROOF PLYWOOD 

UNDERLAYMENT FOR SS 

COUNTERTOP. 

5/8" LEG SCREW WITH WASHER @ 

12" O.C. COUNTERSINK HEAD OF 

SCREW IN TOP PLYWOOD. DRILL 

AND GROUT IN EXISTING 

MASONRY WALL. 

4 1/2" 

2'-10" FROM EXTERIOR GRADE 

3X3X1/4" GALVANIZED STEEL 

PLATE. BOLTED TO EXISTING 

MASONRY WALL WITH 5/8" BOLT 

FASTNER AND WASHER EACH END 

OF COUNTERTOP 

3"X3"X1/4 "L" WELD 

CONTINUOUSLY WITH THE 

PLATE EACH END. TAP 

PLYWOOD WITH THE "L" 

N 

Drawing Title 

Phase 


Date 

Revisions 


CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 

DETAILS 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

AV Author 

TJ Checker 


1:1 

2 DETAIL AT LOW COUNTER - TICKET BOOTH 

1" = 1'-0" 

3 DETAIL AT HIGH COUNTER - TICKET BOOTH SECTION DETAIL AT SNACK BAR 

4 

1" = 1'-0" 

1" = 1'-0" 

W 

E 

Sheet 

Number 

A501 

S

ELECTRICAL NOTES 

ELECTRICAL DEVICES SYMBOLS 

ABBREVIATIONS 

1. WORK SHOWN IS DIAGRAMMATIC AND IS FOR CIRCUIT ALLOCATION ONLY. THE DRAWINGS INDICATE THE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE ALL DEVICE 

LOCATIONS WITH ACTUAL DOOR SWINGS, CABINETS, COUNTERS, ETC., AS INDICATED IN ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. 

2. REFER TO ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR POSSIBLE INTERFERENCES, BEFORE BID IS MADE. NO ALLOWANCE SHALL SUBSEQUENTLY BE MADE TO THE CONTRACTOR BY REASON OF HIS 

FAILURE TO HAVE MADE SUCH EXAMINATIONS OR OF ANY ERROR ON HIS PART. 

3. SEPARATE NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS TO BE RUN WITH ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS. 

4. ALL CIRCUITS TO BE RUN WITH GREEN GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SIZED PER NEC 250.122. 

5. MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF ALL DEVICES ARE TO CENTER OF DEVICE, OUTLET, FIXTURE OR EQUIPMENT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 

6. RECEPTACLES AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS SHOWN ADJACENT ON DRAWINGS, SHALL BE MOUNTED 8" APART ON CENTER HORIZONTALLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE EXACT 

LOCATION OF ALL BOXES IN TWO HOUR OR LESS RATED ASSEMBLIES SUCH THAT AREA OF BOX PER WALL AREA AND OUTLETS ON OPPOSITE SIDE WALL HORIZONTAL SPACING COMPLY WITH 

STATE BUILDING CODE REGARDING FIRE RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION. 

7. WHENEVER SIMILAR DEVICE ARE SHOWN TOGETHER, THEY SHALL BE GANGED IN ONE BOX WITH A SINGLE COVER PLATE. 

8. WHERE GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTION PROTECTION IS REQUIRED FOR PERSONNEL PROTECTION (GFI OR GFCI), THIS PROTECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED BY USE OF APPROVED AND 

RATED OUTLETS AND METHODS, OR BY USING OF A GFCI RATED CIRCUIT BREAKER. ALL GFCI OUTLETS SHALL BE LABELED "GFCI PROTECTED" 

9. OFFSET BACK-TO-BACK OUTLETS SO THAT A MINIMUM OF 6" SEPARATION EXISTS INTO THE REGULAR WALLS, OR 24" SEPARATION EXISTS INTO THE SOUND PROOFED RATED WALLS TO 

AVOID SOUND TRANSMISSION THROUGHOUT THE WALL. OTHER SOUND INSULATION METHODS, SUCH BAFFLE, SHALL BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT WHENEVER REQUIRED. 

10.ALL EMPTY CONDUITS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH PULL-WIRE AND WILL BE SUBBED-UP A.F.F., OR ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING AS THE CASE MAY BE, AND SHALL BE CAPPED AT BOTH ENDS. 

11.NUMBER OF BENDS IN A CONDUIT SECTION RUN SHALL NOT EXCEED TWO 90-DEGREE BENDS, OR EQUIVALENT OF SWEEPS AND RADIUS BENDS. 

12.ALL LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING SHALL BE ROUTED IN EMT CONDUITS, OR OTHER APPROVED CONDUITS, EXCEPT WHERE RUN IS CONCEALED IN ACCESSIBLE AREAS. ALL 

EXPOSED WIRING SHALL BE PLENUM RATED AND SUPPORTED AS REQUIRED BY CODE. 

13.WIRING FOR ALL LOW VOLTAGE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS SHALL BE RUN IN DEDICATED RACEWAYS AND NOT SHARED WITH POWER WIRING OR OTHER SYSTEMS. 

14.ALL WORK SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ENFORCED EDITION OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, N.F.P.A. 70, DHSR, NATIONAL ELECTRICAL SAFETY 

CODE, ANSI AND ALL LOCAL AND STATE CODES AND REGULATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY THE BUILDING AND SAFETY 

CODES AND ORDINANCES, AND THE RULES AND REGULATIONS OF ANY LEGAL BODY HAVING JURISDICTION. 

15.ALL ELECTRICAL ITEMS, MATERIALS, DEVICES, APPLIANCES SHALL BE U.L. LABELED AND LISTED BY A MARYLAND APPROVED AGENCY. 

16.ALL NECESSARY ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS TO EXISTING WORK SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN A COMPLETE AND PROPER ELECTRICAL 

INSTALLATION. THIS WORK SHALL INCLUDE: 

a. RELOCATION OF PULL BOXES, RACEWAYS, ETC., TO PERMIT THE INSTALLATION OF NEW EQUIPMENT; 

b. DISCONNECTION/RECONNECTIONS/REMOVAL/REINSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL SUPPLY, CONTROL, AND UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR CONTINUED OPERATION, INCLUDING 

TEMPORARY WORK AS 

REQUIRED. 

c. PROVISIONS FOR THE RELOCATION OF ALL PIPING, DUCTWORK, ETC., AS REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL WORK, WHERE NOT SHOWN OR SPECIFIED BY OTHERS. THE ELECTRICAL 

CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY 

THE A/E TEAM PRIOR TO BID SO THAT THE APPROPRIATE TRADE MAY BE ASSIGNED TO BID; OTHERWISE, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE 

HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SUCH RELOCATIONS. 

d. EQUIPMENT TO BE TURNED OVER TO OWNER, SHALL BE TURNED OVER IN CLEAN AND WORKING CONDITION. 

e. DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED. REMOVE ALL UNUSED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO POINT OF SERVICE, OR NEXT ACTIVE DEVICE, UNLESS 

THEY ARE TO BE 

REUSED UNDER NEW CONSTRUCTION. 

f. UNUSED CONDUITS CAN BE ABANDONED WHERE CONCEALED IN FLOORS OR WALLS, BUT MUST BE REMOVED FROM CEILING SPACES, EXPOSED AREAS AND ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS. 

g. WHERE WORK UNDER THIS CONTRACT REQUIRES EXTENSION, RELOCATION, RECONNECTIONS OR MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS, THE EXISTING EQUIPMENT OR 

SYSTEM SHALL BE 

RESTORED TO ITS ORIGINAL AND OPERATING CONDITION. EXTEND NEW HOMERUNS OR CIRCUIT EXTENSIONS, WHERE REQUIRED. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE 

ALL EQUIPMENT INDICATED TO BE DEMOLISHED, 

INCLUDING OUTLETS, DEVICES, RELAYS, AND CONDUCTORS. 

OS 

J 

J 

TV 

VFD 

PA 

PP 

OR 

O 

M 

NEMA 14-30R, WALL RECESSED MOUNTED 

RECEPTACLE 30A, 125/250V, 3 POLE, 4 WIRE 

GROUNDING 

120V, DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R, WALL 

RECESSED MOUNTED 457mm (18") AFF, UON 

120V, QUAD RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R, WALL 


208V, DRYER RECEPTACLE, NEMA 14-30R, WALL 


SURFACE MOUNTED 457 mm (18")AFF, UON 

20A, REGULAR VOLTAGE - 120/277V SINGLE POLE, 

GRADE SWITCH. 

WALL MOUNT AT 1.2m (48") AFF TO CENTER UON 

120 VAC, 0-800W BALLAST PASSIVE INFRARED 

DUAL RELAY WALL SWITCH SENSOR. 

120 VAC, 0-800W BALLAST PASSIVE INFRARED 

WALL SWITCH SENSOR. 

MANUAL MOTOR STARTER 

PASSVISE INFRARED LOW VOLTAGE CEILING 

MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR. 

JUNCTION BOX, WALL MOUNTED 

JUNCTION BOX, CEILING MOUNTED 

TV ANTENNA COAX OUTLET, MOUNT SAME 

HEIGHT AS POWER RECEPTACLE OUTLET. 

NON FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH 

FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH 

VFD WITH BYPASS 

PUBLIC ANNOUNCEMENT SYSTEM 

POWER PACK 

EQUIPMENT LEGEND 

FUSED SWITCH 

RECESSED MOUNTED BRANCH PANELBOARD 

SURFACE MOUNTED BRANCH PANELBOARD 

A 

AFC 

AFF 

AFG 

AIC 

ATS 

BFC 

BFG 

C 

CAB 

CCTV 

CEP 

CKT 

CLG 

CT's 

CU 

DWG 

EF 

EMT 

EQUIP 

ETR 

EUH 

EWC 

EWH 

EXH 

EXIST 

FA 

FLA 

FLUOR 

GEN 

GFI 

GFCI 

GFGI 

GFS 

GND 

HGT 

HID 

HPS 

AMPERES 

ABOVE FINISHED CEILING 

ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR 

ABOVE FINISHED GRADE 

AMPERES INTERRUPTING 

CAPACITY 

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 

BELOW FINISHED CEILING 

BELOW FINISHED GRADE 

CONDUIT 

CABINET 

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION 

CENTRAL ENERGY PLANT 

CIRCUIT 

CEILING 

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 

COPPER 

DRAWING(S) 

EXHAUST FAN 

ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING 

EQUIPMENT 


ELECTRIC UNIT HEATER 

ELECTRIC WATER COOLER 

ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 

EXHAUST 

EXISTING 

FIRE ALARM 

FULL LOAD AMPERES 

FLUORESCENT 

ENGINE GENERATOR SET 

GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER 

GROUND FAULT 

CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER 

GOVERNMENT FURNISHED 

GOVERNMENT INSTALLED 

GROUND FAULT SENSOR 

GROUND 

HEIGHT 

HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE 

HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM 

HOA 

HP 

HV 

INC 

JB 

KV 

KVA 

KVAR 

KW 

KWH 

LAN 

LTG 

m 

mm 

MAX 

MCB 

MCC 

MCP 

MFR 

MH 

MIN 

MISC 

MTR 

MTD 

MTG 

MTS 

NC 

NEC 

PNL 

PRI 

PVC 

REC 

RGS 

TEL 

TYP 

UON 

V 

VA 

W 

WP 

XFMR 

HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC 

HORSEPOWER 

HIGH VOLTAGE 

INCANDESCENT 

JUNCTION BOX 

KILO-VOLTS 

KILO-VOLTS-AMPERES 

KILO-VOLTS-AMPERES REACTIVE 

KILO-WATTS 

KILO-WATT-HOURS 

LOCAL AREA NETWORK 

LIGHTING 

METER 

MILLIMETER 

MAXIMUM 

MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER 

MOTOR CONTROL CENTER 

MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 

MANUFACTURER 

METAL HALIDE 

MINIMUM 

MISCELLANEOUS 

MOTOR 

MOUNTED 

MOUNTING 

MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH 

NURSE CALL 

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 

PANEL 

PRIORITY 

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE 

RECEPTACLE 

RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL 

TELEPHONE 

TYPICAL 

UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 

VOLTS 

VOLT-AMPERES 

WATTS 

WEATHER PROOF 

TRANSFORMER 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


17.WIRING DEVICES 

RECEPTACLES 

GENERAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLES SHALL BE INSTALLED ON 15 AND 20 AMP BRANCH CIRCUITS, AND SHALL BE OF THE GROUNDING TYPE WITH EFFECTIVE GROUNDING CONTACTS.`NEMA 

TYPE RECEPTACLES SHALL BE USED IN ALL SPACES. THESE SHALL COMPLY WITH NEMA WD 1 HEAVY DUTY TYPE AND UL 498. DUPLEX RECEPTACLES BODIES SHALL BE BROWN PHENOLIC 

COMPOUND SUPPORTED BY A PLATED STEEL MOUNTING STRAP HAVING PLASTER EARS. GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER DUPLEX RECEPTACLES SHALL BE AN INTEGRAL UNIT SUITABLE FOR 

MOUNTING IN A STANDRAD OUTLET BOX. IT SHALL CONSIST OF A DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT TRANSFORMER,SOLID STATE SENSING CIRCUITRY AND A CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER SWITCH. IT SHALL 

BE RATED FOR OPERATION ON A 60HZ, 120 VOLT, 20-AMPERE BRANCH CIRCUIT. DEVICE SHALL HAVE NOMINAL SENSITIVITY TO GROUND LEAKAGE CURRENT OF FIVE MILLIAMPERES AND SHALL 

FUNCTION TO INTERRUPT THE CURRENT SUPPLY FOR ANY VALUE OF GROUND LEAKAGE CURRENT ABOVE (+ OR - 1 MILLIAMP) ON THE LOAD SIDE OF THE DEVICE. DEVICE SHALL HAVE A 

MINIMUM NOMINAL TRIPPING TIME OF 1/30TH OF A SECOND. DEVICES SHALL MEET UL 943. 

TOGGLE SWITCHES 

TOGGLE SWITCHES SHALL BE TOTALLY ENCLOSED TUMBLER TYPE WITH BODIES OF PHENOLIC COMPOUND. TOGGLE HANLES SHALL BE BLACK IN COLOR. THE ROCKER TYPE SWITCH IS NOT 

ACCEPTABLE AND WILL NOT BE APPROVED. SWITCHES SHALL BE SINGLE UNIT TOGGLE, BUTT CONTACT, QUIET AC TYPE, HEAVY-DUTY GENERAL PURPOSE USE WITH AN INTEGRAL SELF 

GROUNDING MOUNTING STRAP WITH BREAK-OFF PLASTERS EARS AND PROVISIONS FOR BACK WIRING WITH SEPARATE METAL WIRING CLAMPS AND SIDE WIRING WITH CAPTIVELY HELD 

BINDING SCREWS. SWITCHES SHALL BE LISTED BY UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC., AND MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF NEMA WD 1, HEAVY DUTY AND UL 20. SWITCHES SHALL BE 

MOUNTED ON THE STRIKER PLATE SIDE OF DOORS. 

WALL PLATES 

WALL PLATES FOR SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES SHALL BE TYPE 302 STAINLESS STEEL. OVERSIZE PLATES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. STANDARD NEMA DESIGN, SO THAT PRODUCTS OF 

DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS WILL BE INTERCHANGABLE. DIMENSIONS FOR OPENINGS IN WALL PLATES SHALL BE ACCORDANCE WITH NEMA WD1. 

18.RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

CONDUIT SIZE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEC, BUT NOT LESS THAN 1/2 INCH UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.. WHERE PERMITTED BY NEC, 1/2 INCH FLEXIBLE CONDUIT MAY BE USED FOR TAP 

CONNECTIONS TO RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES, MAXIMUM 6 FEET OF CONDUIT. APPROVED CONDUITS SHALL BE (1) ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) FOR CONCEALED INDOORS 

APPLICATIONS. EXPOSED EMT CONDUITS MAY BE USED IN UTLILITY SPACES SUCH AS ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ROOMS. EMT CONDUITS SHALL CONFORM TO UL 797, ANSI C80.3. (2) 

FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) FOR CONNECTING TO TAP CONNECTIONS TO RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURES, EXCEPT USE LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METALCONDUIT (LFMC) IN DAMP OR 

WET LOCATIONS. (3) RIGID STEEL CONDUIT FOR DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT SHALL CONFORM ANSI C80.1. BOXES AND ENCLOSURES SHALL BE EMA 250, TYPE 1, 

EXCEPT FOR DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS USE NEMA 250, TYPE 4, STAINLESS STEEL. FINISH FOR RACEWAY, ENCLOSURE, OR CABINET PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD PRIME-COAT 

FINISH READY FOR FIELD PAINTING. 

19 INTERIOR LIGHTING 

FURNISH LUMINAIRES OF TYPE, KIND, AND WITH NUMBER OF LAMPS AS INDICATED IN THE LUMINAIRES SCHEDULE. THEY SHALL BE FREE OF LIGHT LEAKS, WRAPS, DENTS, OR OTHER 

IRREGULARTIES. LENSES SHALL BE FREE OF CRACKS, CHIPS, OR DISCOLORATIONS. METAL SURFACES OF LIGHTING FIXTURES SHALL BE BONDERIZED, GALVANIZED, OR SHERADIZED AFTER 

FABRICATION AND TREATED TO PROVIDE RUST INHIBITING AND FINISH COAT ADHERENCE PROPERTIES. RECESSED FIXTURES SHALL COMPLY WITH NEMA LE 4 FOR CEILING COMPATIBILITY. 

FLUORESCENT FIXTURES SHALL COMPLY WITH UL 1598, WHERE LER IS SPECIFIED, TEST ACCORDING TO NEMA LE 5 AND NEMA LE5A AS APPLICABLE. SHEET METAL COMPONENTS SHALL 

BE STEEL. FORM AND SUPPORT TO PREVENT WARPING AND SAGGING. REFLECTING SURFACES SHALL HAVE MINIMUM REFLECTANCE AS FOLLOWS : WHITE SURFACES: 85 PERCENT, 

SPECULAR SURFACES 83 PERCENT, DIFFUSING SPECULAR SURFACES: 75 PERCENT, AND LAMINATED SILVER METALLIZED FILM: 90 PERCENT. ACRYLIC LIGHTING DIFFUSERS SHALL BE 100 

PERCENT VIRGIN ACRYLIC PLASTIC. HIGH RESISTANCE TO YELLOWING AND OTHER CHANGES DUE TO AGING, EXPOSURE TO HEAT, AND UV RADIATION LENS THICKNESS SHALL BE AT LEAST 

3.2mm UNLESS DIFFERENT THICKNESS IS SCHEDULED. UV STABILIZED. GLASS SHALL BE ANNEALED CRYSTAL GLASS, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. EXIT SIGNS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING 

UNITS SHALL COMPLY WITH UL 924; FOR SIGN COLORS, VISIBILITY, LUMINANCE, AND LETTER SIZE CONFORM TO DRAWINGS. INTERNALLY LIGHTED SIGNS AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS 

SHALL BE SELF-POWERED (BATTERY TYPE) WITH INTEGRAL AUTOMATIC CHARGER IN A SELF- CONTAINED POWER PACK FURNISHED WITH: 1) BATTERY: SEALED, MAINTENANCE-FREE, NICKEL- 

CADMIUM TYPE, 2) CHARGER: FULLY AUTOMATIC, SOLID-STATE TYPE WITH SEALED TRANSFER RELAY, 3) OPERATION:RELAY AUTOMATICALLY ENERGIZES LAMP FROM BATTERY WHEN CIRCUIT 

VOLTAGE DROPS TO 80 PERCENT OF NOMINAL VOLTAGE OR BELOW. WHEN NORMAL VOLTAGE IS RESTORED RELAY DISCONNECTS LAMPS FROM BATTERY, AND BATTERY IS AUTOMATICALLY 

RECHARGED AND FLOATED ON CHARGER, 4) TEST PUSH BUTTON: PUSH-TO-TEST TYPE, IN UNIT HOUSING, SIMULATES LOSS OF NORMAL POWER AND DEMONSTRATES UNIT OPERABILITY, 5) 

LED POWER INDICATOR LIGHT: INDICATES NORMAL POWER ON. NORMAL GLOW INDICATES TRICKLE CHARGE; BRIGHT GLOW INDICATES CHARGING AT END OF DISCHARGE CYCLE. 

20.LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 

CONDUCTORS MATERIAL SHALL BE COPPER ONLY COMPLYING WITH NEMA WC 70; SOLID CONDUCTOR FOR 10AWG AND SMALLER, STRANDED FOR 8AWG AND LARGER. COPPER SHALL BE 98 

PERCENT CONDUCTIVITY AND HARD DRAWN. BRANCH CIRCUITS CONCEALED IN CEILINGS, WALLS, AND PARTITIONS SHALL BE THHN-THWN, SINGLE CONDUCTORS IN RACEWAY BRANCH 

CIRCUITS CONCEALED IN CONCRETE AND BELOW SLABS-ON - GRADE SHALL BE THHN-THWN, SINGLE CONDUCTORS IN RACEWAY. EXPOSED BRANCH CIRCUITS, INCLUDING CRAWLSPACES 

SHALL BE THHHN-THWN, SINGLE CONDUCTORS IN RACEWAY. CONDUCTOR INSULATION TYPE THHN-THWN SHALL COMPLY NEMA WC 70. CONNECTORS AND SPLICES SHALL BE FACTORY- 

FABRICATED OF SIZE, AMPACITY RATING, MATERIAL, TYPE, AND CLASS FOR APPLICATION AND SERVICE INDICATED. 

RECEPTACLES SUFFIXES 

D = MOUNTED IN DENTAL EQUIPMENT 

E = SUPPLIED FROM EMERGENCY CIRCUIT 

EWC= ELECTRIC WATER COOLER 

G = INTEGRAL GROUND 

GFI = GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTED 

HG = HOSPITAL GRADE 

OC = MOUNTED ABOVE COUNTER TOP. MOUNT DEVICE SUCH 

THAT THE BOTTOM OF COVER PLATE IS 51MM (2") ABOVE 

TOP OF BACK SPLASH OR ABOVE FINISHED COUNTER TOP. 

UPS = SUPPLIED FROM UPS BACKUP CIRCUIT 

TR = TAMPER RESISTANT 

WP = WEATHERPROOF COVER 

+1200(48")=MOUNT DEVICE AT 1200MM (48") AFF TO CENTER. 

SWITCHES SUFFIXES 

2 = TWO POLE 

3 = THREE-WAY 

4 = FOUR-WAY 

A = AUXILIARY SWITCH/DIMMER 

D = DIMMER SWITCH (MATCH TYPE WITH LAMP/BALLAST) 

F = FAN SPEED CONTROLLER 

JD = RECESSED JAMB DOOR SWITCH 

K = KEY OPERATED SWITCH 

M = MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH MELTING ALLOY 

HEATER ELEMENTS 

MC = MOMENTARY CONTACT TOGGLE SWITCH 

MD = MOTORIZED DOOR SWITCH, WITH UP/DOWN POSITION 

OS = OCCUPANCY SENSOR, PASSIVE INFRARED TECHNOLOGY 

OM = OCCUPANCY SENSOR, MOTION DETECTION TECHNOLOGY 

OD = OCCUPANCY SENSOR, DUAL TECHNOLOGY 

T = 1-HR TIMER 

LIGHTING FIXTURE SYMBOLS 

COMMUNICATION DEVICES SYMBOLS 

DATA/PHONE COMBINATION OUTLETS, WALL 

RECESSED MOUNT, 18" AFF UON. NUMBER OF 

OUTLETS: (1D) RJ-45 DATA AND (1P) 

RJ-11 TELEPHONE, U.O.N. 

DATA OUTLET, WALL RECESSED MOUNT, 18" AFF 

UON. NUMBER OF OUTLETS: (2D) RJ-45 DATA 

U.O.N. 

TELEPHONE OUTLET, WALL RECESSED MOUNT, 18" AFF UON. NUMBER 

OF OUTLETS: (1) RJ-11 TELEPHONE, U.O.N. 

SECURITY DEVICES SYMBOLS 

CM 

PHASE CONDUCTORS 

ID 

ID 

CEILING RECESSED, FLUORESCENT 2' x 4' LAY-IN. 

OUTDOOR WALL RECESSED, METAL HALIDE 

CAMERA 

HOMERUN SPECIFICATION 

PNL:CKT# 

GROUNDING 

NEUTRAL 

HOME RUN TO PANEL-ARROWHEADS INDICATE 

CIRCUITS. WIRE INDICATED ARE NEUTRAL AND 

THREE HOT LEGS (A DIFFERENT PHASE FOR EACH 

CIRCUIT) MAXIMUM THREE CIRCUITS PER CONDUIT. 

ALL CIRCUITRY SHALL ALSO CONTAIN AN INSULATED 

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. WHEN A SINGLE 

GROUND, NEUTRAL AND PHASE 

CONDUCTOR (SINGLE PHASE L-N CIRCUITS) ARE 

INSTALLED, TICK MARKS INDICATING WIRE TYPES 

ARE NOT SHOWN. 

Drawing Title 

Phase 


Date 


Revisions 


CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 

SYMBOLS AND 

ABBREIVATIONS 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 

Drawn By 

FM 


1:1 

Checked By 

MT 

ELECTRICAL PANEL AND CIRCUIT NUMBER. SEE 

PANEL SCHEDULE 

FOR WIRE AND CONDUIT SIZE 

Sheet 

Number 

E001

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



GFI 

C 

GFI 

A-12 1 

(ETR) LIGHT FIXTURE 

(ETR) 

LIGHT 

SWITCH 

C 

(ETR) COAXIAL 

OUTLET 

J 

T 

C 

C 

6 

A-11 3 

CM 

C C C 

A-10 2 

5 

8" ± 

A-8 5 (ETR) BLACKLIGHT 

SWITCH 

(ETR) 

SECURITY 

CAMERA 

C 

C 

C 

CS 

C 

P 

C 

C J 

T 

(ETR) UP-STOP-DOWN SWITCH 

(ETR) EXIT GATE PUSH BUTTON 

7 

(TYP. OF 8) 

NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 



(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


1. EXISTING WORK/EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN 

IS SHOWN IN LIGHT LINES AND EXISTING TO 

BE DEMO WORK/EQUIPMENT IS SHOWN IN 

DARK LINES U.O.N. 

KEYNOTES: 

# 

1. REUSE EXISTING CIRCUIT A-12 TO FEED 

NEW RECEPTACLES AS SHOWN ON SHEET 

EP101. 


NEW RECEPTACLES AS SHOWN SHEET 

EP101. 

(ETR) CONNECTION 

TO SWITCH BANK 


NEW RECEPTACLES AS SHOWN SHEET 

EP101. 

4. REUSE EXISTING CIRCUIT TO FEED NEW 

OUTDOOR CLOCK AS SHOWN ON 

SHEET EP101. 

(ETR) SWITCH BANK 


NEW LIGHTING FIXTURES AS SHOWN 

SHEET EL101. 

6. RELOCATE EXISTING AMPLIFIER LEVEL 

CONTROL SWITCHES TO A NEW 

LOCATION AS SHOWN ON SHEET ET101. 

7. REMOVE EXISTING LIGHTING FIXTURES 

IN BREEZEWAY. 


4 

C 

1 ELECTRICAL ADMIN DEMOLITION PLAN 

3/16" = 1'-0" 

Revisions 

Drawing Title 

Phase 

ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 

PLAN 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 



Date 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 


1:1 

N 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

FM 

MT 

W 

E 

Sheet 

Number 

ED101 

S

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



(ETR) LIGHT 

FIXTURE 

MECH ROOM 

5 

ACCOUNTING 

OFFICE 

4 

3 

A-8 

2 

M 

1 

M 

NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 



(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


STAFF BREAK 

ROOM 

9 

TOILET 

7 

TELECOM 

ROOM 

5 

4 

CIRCILATION 

10 

D 

F 

TICKET 

COUNTER 

3 

M 

M 

1. EXISTING WORK/EQUIPMENT IS SHOWN 

IN LIGHT LINES AND NEW 

WORK/EQUIPMENT IS SHOWN IN DARK 

LINES U.O.N. 

2. MINIMUM SIZE DIAMETER EMT CONDUIT 

1/2" WITH COMPRESSION TYPE FITTINGS. 

M 

FIRST AID 

ROOM 

25 

M 

MULTIPURPOSE 

ROOM 

8 

ADMIN OFFICE 

1 

M 

M 

KEYNOTES: 

1. MOUNTING HEIGHT OF NEW TYPE "M" 

FIXTURE TO MATCH MOUNTING HEIGHT 

OF EXISTING TO BE DEMO FIXTURE, 9'-6" 

AFF. 

# 


NEW TYPE "M" LIGHT FIXTURE. 

(ETR) SWITCH BANK 

(ETR) CONNECTION 

TO SWITCH BANK 


TYPE "F" LIGHT FIXTURE. 

4. SINGLE POLE DIMMER SWITCH. 

COMMERCIAL GRADE, UL LISTED WITH 

DIGITAL CIRCUITRY FOR SOFT-ON/FADE- 

OFF OPERATION, GREEN LOCATOR LIGHT 

AND SCREWLESS. MAXIMUM LOAD 120V 

FLUORESCENT 1000VA, LINE VOLTAGE 

REGULATION, RFI NOISE SUPPRESSION. 

LEVITON MONET MNX10-1LW OR 

APPROVED EQUAL. 

1 LIGHTING NEW WORK PLAN 3/16" = 1'-0" 


Revisions 

Drawing Title 

LIGHTING PLAN 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 



Date 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 


1:1 

N 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

FM 

MT 

W 

E 

Sheet 

Number 

EL101 

S

THREE POSITION SWITCH IN A SINGLE - GANG 

SWITCH BOX FOR CLOCK MOVEMENT POWER/CONTROL 

RUN/FAST/STOP. 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 

3 #14AWG 120V CONDUCTORS 

FOR MOVEMENT POWER/CONTROL 

120V, 0.25A PRIMARY 

POWER FOR CLOCK 



N.T.S. 

MECH ROOM 

5 

2 #12 + 1 #12G. 

STAFF BREAK 

ROOM 

9 

FIRST AID 

ROOM 

25 

C 

GFI 

A-12 

TOILET 

7 

4 

A-11 

TELECOM 

4 ROOM 

5 

ACCOUNTING 

OFFICE 

4 

2 #12 + 1 #12G. 

C C C 

PANEL A1- 13 

CIRCILATION 

10 

PANEL A1 

PANEL A 

A-10 

4 

+60" 

11 

+60" 

TICKET 

COUNTER 

PANEL 3 A1- 

11,12 

PANEL A1- 15 

+36" 

CM +36" 

+36" 

+36" 

(ETR) 

SECURITY 

CAMERA 

1 

2 OUTDOOR CLOCK WIRING DIAGRAM NIKA A+E 

451 HUNGERFORD DRIVE (P)301.770.3520 

4TH FLOOR 

(F)301.770.3521 

ROCKVILLE, MD 20850 www.nika-ae.com 


1. EXISTING WORK/EQUIPMENT IS SHOWN 

IN LIGHT LINES AND NEW 

WORK/EQUIPMENT IS SHOWN IN DARK 

LINES U.O.N. 


1/2" WITH COMPRESSION TYPE FITTINGS. 

08.12.2013 

MULTIPURPOSE 

ROOM 

8 

ADMIN OFFICE 

1 

3 

KEYNOTES: 

# 

C 

1. CEILING MOUNTED RECEPTACLE FOR 

EXISTING P.A. EQUIPMENT. 

2. POWER CONNECTION FOR FOR NEW 

OUTDOOR CLOCK. REUSE EXISTING 

CIRCUIT TO FEED NEW CLOCK. 

3. THREE-POSITION SWITCH TO CONTROL 

NEW CLOCK. LOCATE SWITCH IN A SINGLE- 

GANG BOX FLUSHED MOUNTED ON 

WALL. REFER TO WIRING DIAGRAM ON THIS 

SHEET. 


RECEPTACLES. 

2 


C 

1 POWER NEW WORK PLAN 

3/16" = 1'-0" 

Revisions 

Drawing Title 

POWER PLAN 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 


Date 


07.19.2013 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 


1:1 

N 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

FM 

MT 

W 

E 

Sheet 

Number 

EP101 

S

CEILING 

3 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 

1 1 

4 

2 



5 

(TYPICAL OF 6) 

NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


1 




3 TYPICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 3/16" = 1'-0" 

N.T.S. 

Date 

CADD Filename 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 



NOTES: 

1. EXISTING WORK/EQUIPMENT IS SHOWN IN 

LIGHT LINES AND NEW WORK/EQUIPMENT 

1. (ETR) ICS CONTROL UNIT - ICSNT7B53 

IS SHOWN IN DARK LINES U.O.N. 

MECH ROOM 

5 

BRAND: NORSTAR 

MANUFACTURER: NORTEL NETWORKS. 


1" U.O.N. 

ACCOUNTING 

OFFICE 

2. (ETR) FIBER PATCH PANEL. 

3. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL CABLES, 

4 

1 

2 

3. (ETR) COPPER PATCH PANEL. 

OUTLETS, TESTING, TERMINATIONS UP 

TO TELECOM ROOM PATCH PANELS, AND 

STAFF BREAK 

TOILET 

4. (ETR) NETWORK FIBER SWITCH. 

CROSS CONNECTIONS FROM PATCH 

PANELS TO SWITCHES. 

ROOM 

7 

9 

J 

J 

5. (ETR) BIX BLOCK. 

T 

T 

2 

ET101 

CIRCILATION CM 

KEYNOTES: # 

3 

EXISTING TELECOM ROOM 5 - NORTH WALL ELEVATION 

10 

2 

N.T.S. 

6 CAT 6 IN 1" EMTC. 

BREEZE 

1. TERMINATE 4PR UTP CAT6/GRAY 

WAY 

CABLES IN EXISTING BIX BLOCK. 

TICKET 

COUNTER 

FIRST AID 

TELECOM 

HORIZONTAL CROSS-CONNECT 

2. TERMINATE 4PR UTP CAT6/BLUE CABLES 

ROOM 

3 

ROOM 

IN EXISTING COPPER PATCH PANEL. 

25 

5 

(ETR) 

4 PR UTP CAT6/GRAY 

SECURITY 

3. EXISTING RELOCATED AMPLIFIER LEVEL 

CAMERA 

(ETR) 

(ETR) 

BIX 

CONTROL SWITCHES 

BIX 

ADMIN OFFICE 

BLOCKS BLOCKS 

1 

MULTIPURPOSE 

ROOM 

1 

8 

4 PR UTP CAT6/BLUE 

TELEPHONE 

NEW PATCHCORD 

JACK 

JACK 


(ETR) COPPER PATCH PANEL 

(ETR) CLIENT SWITCH 

DATA 

FACE PLATE EXISTING TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM 5 

OUTLET 

NOTES: 

Revisions 

1. TELEPHONE JACK SHALL BE RJ11 TYPE CONNECTION AND SHALL BE GRAY IN COLOR. 

Drawing Title 

2. DATA JACK SHALL BE RJ45 TYPE CONNECTION AND SHALL BE BLUE IN COLOR. 

TELECOM PLAN 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 


Drawn By 

Checked By 

FM 

MT 

Sheet 

Number 

ET101

Notes: 

BRANCH PANEL: PANEL A 

Location: CIRCILATION 10 Volts: 208/120 A.I.C. Rating: N/A 

Supply From: "MDP" 

Phases: 3 Mains Type: MLO 

Mounting: RECESSED Wires: 4 Mains Rating: 225 A 

Enclosure: NEMA 1 

MCB Rating: N/A 

CKT Circuit Description Trip Poles A B C Poles Trip Circuit Description CKT 

1 (EX) FURNANCE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 3 40 A (EX) AIR CONDITIONER 2 

3 (EX) LIGHTING 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 -- -- -- 4 

5 (EX) LIGHTING 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 -- -- -- 6 

7 (EX) RECEPTACLES 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) LIGHTING 8 

9 (EX) RECEPTACLES 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) RECEPTACLES 10 

11 (EX) RECEPTACLES 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) RECEPTACLES 12 

13 (EX) WATER COOLER 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) RECEPTACLES 14 

15 (EX) WASHER 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) RECEPTACLES 16 

17 (EX) UNDERWATER LIGHTS 30 A 2 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) CASH REGISTER 18 

19 -- -- -- 0.0 0.0 2 30 A (EX) DRYER 20 

21 (EX) POOL SITE LIGHTING 20 A 2 0.0 0.0 -- -- -- 22 

23 -- -- -- 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) UNDERWATER LIGHTS 24 

25 (EX) POOL SITE LIGHTING 20 A 2 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) UNDERWATER LIGHTS 26 

27 -- -- -- 0.0 0.0 2 20 A (EX) POOL SITE LIGHTING 28 

29 (EX) SITE LIGHTING 20 A 2 0.0 0.0 -- -- -- 30 

31 -- -- -- 0.0 0.0 2 20 A (EX) POOL SITE LIGHTING 32 

33 (EX) PARKING LOT LIGHTS 20 A 2 0.0 0.0 -- -- -- 34 

35 -- -- -- 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) STEP LIGHTS 36 

37 (EX) REFRIGERATOR 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 3 100 A (EX) SUBFEED 38 

39 (EX) ROLL UP DOOR 20 A 2 0.0 0.0 -- -- -- 40 

41 -- -- -- 0.0 0.0 -- -- -- 42 

Total Load: 0.0 kVA 0.0 kVA 0.0 kVA 

Total Amps: 0 A 0 A 0 A 

Legend: 


BRANCH PANEL: PANEL A1 

Location: CIRCILATION 10 Volts: 208/120 A.I.C. Rating: N/A 

Supply From: PANEL "A" 

Phases: 3 Mains Type: MLO 

Mounting: RECESSED Wires: 4 Mains Rating: 100 A 

Enclosure: NEMA 1 

MCB Rating: N/A 

A B C 

CKT Circuit Description Trip Poles 

Poles Trip Circuit Description CKT 

1 (EX) TELEPHONE RECEPTACLE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) COTTON CANDY MACHINE 2 

3 (EX) CONTROL RELAYS 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A (EX) POPCORN MACHINE 4 

5 (EX) RECEPTACLES 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A EXISTING LOAD 6 

7 (EX) COTTON CANDY MACHINE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 0 A (EX) RECEPTACLE IN BREEZEWAY 8 

9 (EX) RECEPTACLE - NEW FURNANCE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 0 A (EX) RECEPTACLES - NEW FINANCE 10 

11 RECEPTACLES - TICKET COUNTER 20 A 1 0.5 0.4 1 20 A RECEPTACLES - TICKET COUNTER 12 

13 RECEPTACLES - TICKET COUNTER 20 A 1 0.4 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 14 

15 RECEPTACLES - RADIO CHARGER 20 A 1 0.7 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 16 

17 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 18 

19 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 20 

21 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 22 

23 SPARE 20 A 1 0.0 0.0 1 20 A SPARE 24 

Total Load: 0.4 kVA 0.7 kVA 0.9 kVA 

Total Amps: 3 A 6 A 8 A 

Legend: 

Load Classification Connected Load Demand Factor Estimated Demand Panel Totals 

Other 2.0 kVA 100.00% 2.0 kVA 

Total Conn. Load: 2.0 kVA 

Total Est. Demand: 2.0 kVA 

Total Conn. Current: 5 A 

Total Est. Demand Current: 5 A 

GAITHERSBURG 

WATER PARK 

PHASE II 



NIKA A+E 


4TH FLOOR 


(P)301.770.3520 

(F)301.770.3521 


Load Classification Connected Load Demand Factor Estimated Demand Panel Totals 

Total Conn. Load: 0.0 kVA 

Total Est. Demand: 0.0 kVA 

Total Conn. Current: 0 A 

Total Est. Demand Current: 0 A 


1. CONNECTED LOAD OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT IS UNKNOWN. 

2. UPDATE EXISTING PANELBOARD DIRECTORY WITH NEW INSTALLED CIRCUIT LOADS. 


1. CONNECTED LOAD OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT IS UNKNOWN. 

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 

LAMP DATA 

BALLAST DATA 

LETTER 

TYPE 

FIXTURE 

TYPE 

LENSE LOUVER 

MOUNTING 

VOLTS 

FLUORESC 

METAL HALID 

HALOGEN 

LED 

NO 

NOMINAL 

WATTS 

TYPE 

INITIAL 

LUMENS MEAN 

LUMENS 

NO 

TYPE 

POWER 

FACTOR 

BALLAST 

FACTOR 

INPUT 

WATTS 

MANUFACTURER CATALOG NO. NOTES 

F 

2' X 4' DIRECT/INDIRECT 

GLARE FREE 

ILLUMINATION 

SOFT, HIGH 

REFLECTANCE 

MATTE WHITE FINISH 

CEILING 

RECESSED 

120 X 3 54 L.F. 5100 4750 

1 ELECTRONIC 

DIMMING 

0.9 

8 

1.0 176 

DAY-BRITE LIGHTING 

OR 


2-AVE-G-3-54HO-PMW-120- 

EBD-GLR1 

- DIMMING CONTROL (0-10VDC, DALI, ETC) 

- FLUORESCENT BALLAST TO HAVE 3500K COLOR 

TEMPERATURE AND 85+ CRI FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT 

- SINGLE FUSING 

M 

WALL SCONCE 

NICHIA LEDS (3 PER 

BOARD) TIGER WALL 

LUMINAIRE RAW ALUM. 

REFLECTOR WITH OPEN 

TOP/BOTTOM WHITE 

ACRYLIC DIFFUSER 2 

THOMAS RESEARCH 

WALL 

RECESSED 

120 X 2 43.68 

LED 1986 99 LUMENS 

PER WATT 

1 N/A 0.9 

0 

- 

9 

TERON LIGHTING 

OR 


TGR-L18.0-120-WAL-TE500- 

BZ-40K 

-ALUMINUM MOUNTING PAN 

-LUMINOUS WHITE POWDER COAT FINISH 

-LUMINOUS WHITE ACRYLIC DIFFUSER 

-OPEN TOP AND BOTTOM 

-22 LED MODULES ON 9W STRIP 

-20W DRIVER 


Revisions 

Drawing Title 

ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES 

Phase 

CONCEPT 35% 60% 90% 100% 



Date 

08.12.2013 

07.19.2013 


CADD Filename 

Revit Model 


1:1 

Drawn By 

Checked By 

FM 

MT 

Sheet 

Number 

E601


Gaithersburg Water Park Phase Water II Improvements 

Park-Phase II 

PROJECT BINDER 

451 Hungerford Drive, 4 th Floor 301.770.3520 301.770.3521 www.nika-ae.com LEADING DESIGN. EXPERT RESULTS. 

Rockville, MD 20850 TEL FAX WEB

Table of Contents 

PRODUCT DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS 

FIX POST, REMOVABLE POST AND SOCKET, ROPE CUT SHEETS ........................... TAB-1 

ROLLUP SERVICE COUNTER DOOR CUT SHEETS ......................................................... TAB-2 

BREEZEWAY LED LIGHT CUT SHEET ................................................................................. TAB-3 

ADA SHOWER HEAD AND FAUCET CUT SHEETS ........................................................... TAB-4 

CABINET AND HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................. TAB-5 

EIFS SYSTEM 

WATER PARK GABLES REPORT .......................................................................................... TAB-6 

BASIS OF DESIGN EIFS SYSTEM SEPCIFICATIONS ....................................................... TAB-7 

BASIS OF DESIGN EIFS SYSTEM DATA SHEET ............................................................... TAB-8 

BASIS OF DESIGN EIFS SYSTEM INSTALLATION DETAILS ......................................... TAB-9 

BASIS OF DESIGN EIFS SYSTEM APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS ............................. TAB-10

TAB-1 

FIX POST, REMOVABLE POST AND SOCKET, ROPE CUT SHEETS

color selection by 

owner

TAB-2 

ROLLUP SERVICE COUNTER DOOR CUT SHEET

Metal Curtain Rolling Counter Doors 

SERIES 650 651 652 

Technical Data 

Application 

Mounting position 

Operation 

Warranty 

Curtain 

Max. standard width 

Max. standard height 

Slats 

Finish 

Commercial, retail, corporate and professional environments. 

These doors are ideal for a host of small-opening applications 

where security is important. Common applications include 

concession areas, cafeterias, pharmacies, parts-storage areas, 

and ticket windows. 

Face of wall, between jambs 

Standard: Manual push up; Optional: Crank, Electric 

24-month limited 

20' (6096 mm) 

9' (2743 mm) 

Interlocking flat profile slats with endlocks. Slat profile type F-158, 

fabricated of galvanized steel (650 Series); stainless steel (651 

Series); aluminum (652 Series) 

650 Series: galvanized steel primed with choice of baked-on 

polyester top coat in gray or tan 651 Series: No. 4 finished 

stainless steel 652 Series: Aluminum, clear anodized; Option: 

bronze anodized; Option: powder-coat paint finish in 197 

standard colors, or color-matched to specification 

Distinguished by their metal slat 

curtain finish, the 650, 651 and 

652 Series rolling counter doors 

are designed to fit openings to 20' 

wide and 9' high (6096 mm and 

2473 mm). Finishes available include 

galvanized, painted steel (650), No. 

4 finish stainless steel (651), and 

clear anodized aluminum (652). These 

doors are ideal for a host of smallopening 

applications where security 

is important and a non-rated door* 

is appropriate. Common applications 

include concession areas, cafeterias, 

pharmacies, parts-storage areas, and 

ticket windows. 

Door Selection Guide 

Other 

Guides 

Standard: extruded aluminum Option: 11-gauge roll-formed 

steel guides (650/652 Series); stainless steel guides (651 Series) 

Counterbalance Helical torsion springs housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel 

Brackets 

Steel plate to support curtain, counterbalance, and hood 

Hood 650 Series: galvanized steel; 651 Series: stainless steel; 652 

Series: aluminum 

Locking 

Options 

Slat Data 

Standard: Interior slide bolt Optional: cylinder lock 

• Vision lites 

• Perforated slats 

• Fenestrated slats with uniformly spaced openings of 5/8" 

x 3" (16 mm x 76 mm) 

• PowderGuard TM premium powder coat paint finish in 197 

standard colors, or color-matched to specification 

• PowderGuard TM Zinc and PowderGuard TM Weathered 

finishes 

Curtain 

Slat 

Series 650 Galv. steel F-158 

Finish 

Gray or 

Tan 

Hood 

Series 651 Stainless F-158 #4 Stainless 

Series 652 Aluminum F-158 

Guides 

Galv. steel 

Aluminum/ 

Primed Steel 

Aluminum/ 

Stainless 

Bottom Bar 

Primed 

Steel 

Stainless 

Clear 

Anodized 

Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum 

The color palette for rolling steel products 

PowderGuard finish offers full spectrum of up to 215 

colors as well as color matching to specification. 

Headroom Clearance Dimensions 

Dimension A F-158 Slat 

Opening Height 

Thru 5'0" (1524 mm) 

Thru 8'4" (2540 mm) 

A Dimension – headplate width 

9 1/2" (241 mm) 

11 1/2" (292 mm) 

F-158 Slat 

1 1/2" 

*Ask our distributors for more information on our fire-rated door offering. 

1/2" 

Series Slat Opening Width Standard 

650 F-158 Thru 20'0" (6096 mm) 22 ga. 

651 F-158 

F158 Slat 

Thru 20'0" (6096 mm) 22 ga. ss 

652 F-158 Thru 20'0" (6096 mm) aluminum 

4

Rolling CounterDoor Systems 

SERIES 650 651 652 

Door Clearance Elevations 

Face-of-Wall Mounted 

Operation: Push-up, chain hoist or electric.* 

*Operator details on Page 12 

Between Jambs Mounted 

Operation: Push-up, chain hoist or electric.* 

Dimension A Series 650, 651 and 652 

Opening Height 

0'0" to 5'3" 

5'3" to 9'0" 

A Dimension – headplate width 

9 1/2" (241 mm) 

10 1/2" (267 mm) 

OVERHEAD DOOR CORPORATION 

5

Rolling CounterDoor Systems 

SERIES 650 651 652 

Guides 

Between Jambs Mounted 

Extruded Aluminum Guides 

Rolled Steel/Stainless Steel 

Push-up: Tension & Drive Side 

Crank or Electric: 

Tension Side Only 

Push-up: Tension Side 

Push-up: Tension & Drive Side 


Tension Side Only 


Drive Side Only 


Drive Side Only 

RTM Operator 

3 3/8" 

Between Jambs 

Extruded Aluminum Guide 

OVERHEAD DOOR CORPORATION 

7

TAB-3 

BREEZEWAY LED LIGHT FIXTURE CUT SHEET

Project: 

Type: 

Ordering # : 

Comments: 

ARCHITECTURAL INDOOR 

TIGER LED 

• Steel Fascia w/ Matte Silver 

Powder Coat Finish 

• Aluminum Mounting Pan w/ Luminous White 


• Luminous White Acrylic Diffuser 

• Open Top & Bottom 

• Mounts Directly to 4” Junction Box (By Others) 

• Mounting Hardware Included 

• 22 LED Modules on Each 6W & 9W Strip 

• 20W Driver 

(Incandescent Line Voltage Dimming is Standard) 

• Dimmable to 10% 

• Surge Protector 

• ADA Compliant 

• CSA Listed Dry Location 

FEATURES 

ORDERING INFORMATION 

Example : (TGR - L18.0 - 100 - 277V - WAL - TE500 - SN - 35K) 

Matte Silver is Standard Finish 

TGR 

PRODUCT SOURCE/WATTAGE VOLTAGE DIFFUSER DRIVER OPTIONS FINISH OPTIONS 

Tiger L12.0 - (2) 6W LED Strips 

L18.0 - (2) 9W LED Strips 

Please See Page 2 For 

Wattage Specifications 

100 - 277V WAL - White 

Acrylic Lens 

(Standard) 

FRL - Frosted 

Acrylic Lens 

LE350 - 350mA Line Voltage 

Dimming Incandescent 

Driver 

(Standard For L12.0) 

LE500 - 500mA Line Voltage 

Dimming Incandescent 

Driver 

(Standard For L18.0) 

TE350 * - 350mA Low 

Voltage Dimming Electronic 

Driver 

(For Use with L12.0) 

TE500 * - 500mA Low 

Voltage Dimming Electronic 

Driver 

(For Use With L18.0) 

SM - Matte Silver 

TB - Textured Black 

AC - Antique Copper 

AS - Antique Silver 

BT - Bronze Mist 

CP - Copper 

KC - Kenworth 

Chrome 

SN - Sand 

SW - Swedish Steel 

BZ - Textured Bronze 

TW - Textured White 

RAL Colors or 

Custom Match - 

Consult Factory 

40K - 4000K Color Temp. 



TCV - Perforated Steel Top Cover 

TBC - Perforated Steel Top & Bottom 

Covers 

* For Use With Electronic 

Low Voltage Dimmers 

REPLACEMENT PARTS P A R T N O . NOTES 

White Acrylic Lens 3040960 

Frosted Acrylic Lens 3040962 

We reserve the right to revise the design or components of any product due to 

parts availability or change in UL standards, without assuming any obligation or 

liability to modify any products previously manufactured, and without notice. 

33 Donald Drive Fairfield, OH 45014 ph:(513)858-6004 fax:(513)858-6038 email:sales@teronlight.com web:teronlight.com

Project: 

Type: 

Ordering # : 

Comments: 

ARCHITECTURAL INDOOR 

TIGER LED 

• Steel Fascia w/ Matte Silver 


• Aluminum Mounting Pan w/ Luminous White 


• Luminous White Acrylic Diffuser 

• Open Top & Bottom 

• Mounts Directly to 4” Junction Box (By Others) 

• Mounting Hardware Included 

• 22 LED Modules on Each 6W & 9W Strip 

• 20W Driver 

(Incandescent Line Voltage Dimming is Standard) 

• Dimmable to 10% 

• Surge Protector 

• ADA Compliant 

• CSA Listed Dry Location 

FEATURES 

ORDERING INFORMATION 

Example : (TGR - L18.0 - 100 - 277V - WAL - TE500 - SN - 35K) 

Matte Silver is Standard Finish 

TGR 

PRODUCT SOURCE/WATTAGE 30K SPECIFICATIONS 35K SPECIFICATIONS 40K SPECIFICATIONS 

Tiger L12.0 - (2) 6W LED Strips 

L18.0 - (2) 9W LED Strips 

Please See “Options” 

Column For Specifications 

L12.0 - Two 6W LED Strips 


- 22 Philips Fortimo LEDS Per Linear Strip 

- 32 fV, Color Temp = 3000K Nominal 

- < / = 280mA for LM 80 

- Constant Current 350 Milliamps Driver 

- 14W Input = 1400 LED Lumens 

- Estimated 100 Lumens Per Watt 









































33 Donald Drive Fairfield, OH 45014 ph:(513)858-6004 fax:(513)858-6038 email:sales@teronlight.com web:teronlight.com

TAB-4 

ADA SHOWER HEAD AND FAUCET CUT SHEETS

Spec i fi ca tions 

DESCRIPTION 

• Metal construction with various finishes identified by suffix 

• Pressure balancing cycle valve design with an adjustable 

temperature limit stop 

• 1/2" IPS connections 

• Includes showerhead, arm, flange, and diverter tub spout 

OPERATION 

• Lever style handle 

• Handle operates counterclockwise through a 270˚ arc with off at 

6 o'clock and maximum hot at the 9 o'clock position. Shut off in 

clockwise direction 

• Adjustable temperature limit stop to control maximum hot water 

temperature 

• Pressure balancing mechanism maintains selected discharge 

temperature to ± 2˚ 

FLOW 

• Showerhead is limited to 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min) 

CARTRIDGE 

• 1222 cartridge design 

• Nonmetallic/nonferrous and stainless steel materials 

• Accommodates back to back installations 

STANDARDS 

• Third party certified to ASME A112.18.1/CSA B-125.1 

and all applicable requirements referenced therein 

• ADA for lever handles 

WARRANTY 

• Lifetime limited warranty against leaks, drips and finish 

defects to the original consumer purchaser 

• 5 year warranty if used in commercial installations 

TELFORD 

Single-Handle Shower 

Models: 82968 series 

2" (51 mm) CC 

1-7/8" (48 mm) IPS Max. Wall 

Finished Wall Line 

2-1/2” 

(63mm) 

Face of Stud 

1/2" (13 mm) Min. CC 

5/8" (16 mm) Min. IPS 

3-1/16” 

(78mm) 

2-1/2" Max. 

(63 mm) 

1-3/8" 

(35 mm) 

C L 

6'-6" 

(1981 mm) 

Nomimal 

3/6" (typ) (5mm) 

3-1/2" (90 mm) Max. 

2-1/4" (57mm) Min. 

Plaster Ground 

1-1/2" (38mm) 

C L 

1-3/8" 

(35 mm) 

7” 

(178mm) 

3-1/2" 

(90 mm) 

Shower 

45" (1143 mm)/ 

48" (1219 mm) 

Plastic 

Tub/Shower 

Surround 

Floor Line 

THICK WALL APPLICATION 

Floor Line 

THIN WALL APPLICATION 

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS 

(DO NOT SCALE) 

FOR MORE INFORMATION CALL: 1-800-BUY-MOEN 

www.moen.com

COMMERCIAL 

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s 

DESCRIPTION 

• Brass construction with chrome plated finish 

• 1/2" IPS connections 

OPERATION 

• 4" wrist blade handles with hot and cold color 

indicators* 

*Smooth handle models have hot and cold color 

indicator at torx head screw 

• Vandal resistant torx head screws 

• Vandal resistant aerator 

CARTRIDGE 

• Brass shell, ceramic disc cartridge 

• 1/4 turn operation 

STANDARDS 

• Third party certified to meet A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 

and all applicable spec i fi ca tions referenced therein 

• Certified to NSF 61/9 

• Contains no more than 0.25% weighted average 

lead content 

• Complies with California Proposition 65 and with 

the Federal Safe Drinking Water Act 

• ADA for lever handles 

WARRANTY 

• Warranted for five years against material or 

manufacturing defects 

Two-Handle Bar/Pantry Faucet 

MODEL 

Smooth 

Handle 

FLOW (gpm/Lpm) HANDLE STYLE 

8278 2.2/8.3 Decal 

8278SM 2.2/8.3 Smooth 

8278SMF15 1.5/5.7 Smooth 

NOTE: Designed to be installed through 

2 holes - 1" min. dia. 

9-1/2” 

(241mm) 

4-1/8'' 

(105mm) 

12'' 

(306mm) 

3-5/8” 

(92mm) 

2'' 

(64mm) 

6-1/4” 

(159mm) 

4'' 

(102mm) 

6 x 2-1/4'' Escutcheon 

(152mm) x (56mm) 

2-1/2'' 

(64mm) 

4'' 

(102mm) 

6-1/4'' 

(159mm) 

CRITICAL DIMENSIONS 

(DO NOT SCALE) 

Rev. 1/13 

MOEN SPECIFIER SERVICES 1-800-321-8809 Ext. 2158 

www.moen.com

TAB-5 

CABINET AND HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS

CABINET AND HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS 

1.1 CABINET MATERIALS 

A. Exposed Cabinet Materials: 

1. Wood Species: Red oak, Cherry 

2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, selected for 

compatible color and grain. Grade A exposed faces at least 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick, and 

Grade J cross bands. Provide backs of same species as faces. 

a. Face Veneer Cut: Plain sliced. 

3. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated and selected for grain and 

color compatible with exposed plywood, selected for compatible grain and color. 

4. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS. 

5. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all exposed edges. 

B. Semiexposed Cabinet Materials: 

1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects, of any 

species similar in color and grain to same species as exposed wood. 

2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood of species as exposed wood. Grade B faces and Grade J 

cross bands. Provide backs of same species as faces. 

3. Plastic Laminate: Grade CLS. 

a. Provide plastic laminate for semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Provide plastic laminate for interior faces of doors and drawer fronts and where 

indicated. 

4. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Provide thermoset decorative panels for semiexposed 

surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 

5. Metal for Steel Drawer Pans: Cold-rolled, steel sheet. 

6. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all semiexposed edges. 

C. Concealed Cabinet Materials: 

1. Solid Wood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or 

utility. 

2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood. Provide backs of same species as faces. 

3. Plastic Laminate: Grade BKL. 

1.2 DESIGN, COLOR, AND FINISH 

A. Wood Colors and Finishes: As selected by owner from casework manufacturer's full range. 

B. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated in design drawings. Final 

approval by owner.

C. PVC Edgebanding Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. 

D. Solid-Surfacing Material Colors and Patterns: As indicated in design drawings. Final approval 

by owner. 

1.3 CABINET FABRICATION 

A. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Cabinet Construction: 

1. Bottoms and Ends of Cabinets, and Tops of Wall Cabinets and Tall Cabinets: 3/4-inch 

(19-mm) particleboard, plastic-laminate faced on exposed surfaces, thermoset decorative 

panels on semiexposed surfaces. 

2. Shelves: 3/4-inch (19-mm) thermoset decorative panels. 

3. Shelves: Adjustable metal shelving as indicated in design drawings. 

4. Shelves: 3/4-inch (19-mm) plywood, plastic-laminate faced. 

5. Backs of Cabinets: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) particleboard, plastic-laminate faced on exposed 

surfaces, thermoset decorative panels on semiexposed surfaces. 

6. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch (19-mm) particleboard, plastic-laminate faced. 

7. Drawer Sides and Backs: 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) solid-wood or veneer-core hardwood 

plywood, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints. 

8. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) hardwood plywood glued and dadoed into front, 

back, and sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) material for drawers more than 24 

inches (600 mm) wide. 

9. Drawer Bodies: Steel drawer pans formed from 0.0359-inch- (0.9-mm-) thick metal, 

metallic phosphate treated, and finished with manufacturer's standard 2-coat, bakedenamel 

finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat with a minimum dry 

film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat and 2 mils (0.05 mm) for system. 

10. Doors: 3/4-inch (19-mm) particleboard , plastic-laminate faced. 

B. Leg Shoes: Vinyl or rubber, black, open-bottom type. 

C. Filler Strips: Provide as needed to close spaces between cabinets and walls, ceilings, and 

indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as cabinets. 

1.4 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-finish], 

commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware. 

1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to particleboard 

except where hardware is through-bolted from back side. 

B. Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, semiconcealed, 5-knuckle hinges complying with BHMA A156.9, 

Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide 2 hinges for doors less than 48 

inches (1220 mm) high and 3 hinges for doors more than 48 inches (1220 mm) high. 

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, 100degrees of 

opening self-closing.

D. Pulls: Solid stainless-steel wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws. For sliding doors, 

provide recessed stainless-steel] flush pulls. Provide 2 pulls for drawers more than 24 inches 

(600 mm) wide. 

E. Door Catches: dual, self-aligning, permanent magnet catch. Provide 2 catches on doors more 

than 48 inches (1220 mm) high. 

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091. 

1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravelextension 

type; zinc-plated, steel ball-bearing slides. 

2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high 

and 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 

3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 

24 inches (600 mm) wide. 

4. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1, for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24 

inches (600 mm) wide. 

5. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for computer keyboard shelves. 

6. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100, for trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high 

and 16 inches (400 mm) wide. 

G. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: Cylindrical (cam) type, 5-pin tumbler, brass with chromeplated 

finish, and complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1. 

1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and six master keys. 

2. Provide locks on all doors and drawers. 

H. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Single-pin metal shelf rests complying with BHMA A156.9, 

Type B04013 

I. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Mortise-type, zinc-plated steel standards and shelf rests complying 

with BHMA A156.9, Types B04071 and B04091. 

J. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, molded-plastic 

grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 

K. COUNTERTOPS 

L. Countertops, General: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane free of 

defects. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch (25 mm) over base cabinets. 

M. Solid-Surfacing-Material Tops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material[ with front 

edge built up with same material. 

1. Front: As indicated in design drawings. 

2. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid-surfacing material; slightly eased at 

edge. 

N. Stainless-Steel Tops: Made from 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet. 

1. Weld shop-made joints, and grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional, 

textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed,

passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces 

chemically clean. 

2. Sound deaden undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating. 

3. Extend top down to provide a 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick edge with a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) 

return flange. 

4. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface, with a 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm) thick 

edge and 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) return flange. 

5. Provide raised marine edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch two ways to 

sink to provide drainage without channeling or grooving. 

6. Where stainless-steel sinks occur in stainless-steel tops, factory weld into one integral 

unit, grind welds smooth, and polish, passivate, and rinse. 

7. Fabricate stainless-steel sinks with corners rounded and coved to at least a 5/8-inch (16- 

mm) radius. Slope sink bottoms to outlet. Provide double-wall construction for sink 

partitions with top edge rounded to at least a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) diameter.

TAB-6 

WATER PARK GABELS REPORT

Repair recommendations 

(1) Exterior finish improvements at the existing gable archways 

a. Completely remove DEFS system on the all five gables (gable 1), clock tower (gable 2), 

food court (gable 3), and the two golf gables (gables 4 and 5). 

b. Repair or replace rotted plywood sheathing and framing where needed. 

c. Install ½-inch or 5/8-inch, plywood where necessary, plywood sheathing should be 

exterior - exposure 1. 

d. Install Dryvit liquid applied coating and flashing grade coating as a vapor retarded on the 

surfaces of the exposed sheathing. 

e. Install a Dryvit Outsulation® Plus MD System approved EIFS Class PB system or 

equivalent on the walls. The EPS insulation board must be adhesively attached. 

f. Install new kick out flashings at the shingle roof wall intersections per Dryvit detail. 

g. Metal roof must be installed per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Flashings 

must cover the EIFS system 2 inches. 

h. Sealants must be installed at the kickout flashings and all dissimilar materials in contact 

with the EIFS system. 

References used in the report 

The moisture probe readings and firmness of the substrate (surface to which the DEFS or a cladding is 

applied) is noted on the gable photos in text boxes. The numbers are the moisture probe readings on 

the gables and the letters refer to the firmness of the plywood sheathing: F = Firm, M = Moderately Soft, 

S = Soft 

Red boxes are located on the gables where water damage was found or reasonably believed to be 

present based on view from inside the gables and moisture survey on the exterior surfaces. 

Specific notes for the entire gable conditions are noted under the first gable photo, which is the front 

view.

S 

S 

S 

S 

S 

S 

S 

File Number: 2131 

Front Entrance Gable 

- A test hole left side at hairline crack- with rust colored staining 

- No lath is visible in the hole 

- Fiberglass mesh is visible in the lamina 

- No felt is visible behind the DEFS system 

- An access hole was cut into the backside of the gable to view the interior framing and plywood. 

The gable plywood and framing were not repaired when it was previously repaired 

- The sheathing and framing are in very bad condition

S 

S 

S 

S 

File Number: 2132

S 

S 

S 

S 

File Number: 2133

There are no kickout flashings 

installed at the roof/wall 

intersections on the gables, the 

absence of this flashing allows 

water to enter the wall and 

gable’s interior 


Hairline crack in the DEFS 

File Number: 0718

Interior damage of the plywood 

and framing inside the gable 




File Number: 2202






File Number: 2208

F 


Clock Gable 

- No kickout installed at roof wall intersection 

- Cracks in front of the gable are consistent with the perimeter of a cement board 

- No lath was visible in the probe holes 

- Felt was visible in the probe holes on the backside next to downspouts 

- The hole had what appeared to be a reinforcing mesh in cladding 

- Corner had vinyl casing bead 

- Many hairline cracks are present on the sides of the gable 

- This gable has been painted 

- The cladding on the sides of the gable sounds loose and not firmly secured 

- Cement boards is secured with screws, they come through the plywood about ¼ inch 

- There was a repair on backside under kickout

S 

S 

File Number: 2053

S 

S 

F 

File Number: 2052

Backside of the majority of the 

plywood in the clock gable 

appears in good condition 


Plywood is water damaged at the 

roof/wall intersection where 

there are cracks in the DEFS 

corner 

File Number: 2102

Close-up view of the water 

damage 


Plywood is water damaged at the 

roof/wall intersection where 

there are cracks in the DEFS 

corner 

File Number: 2105

Hairline cracks in the DEFS 

system at the board joints 


Many cracks on the DEFS system 

on the 2 sidewalls 

File Number: 2124

Cracks on the corners are 

allowing water into the wall and 

wetting the plywood 


File Number:

S 

S 

N1 

S 

F 

N3 

F 

S 

N2 

S 

S 


Food Court Gable 

- Corner lamina was loose above the left column and it was removed to view the sheathing and 

construction details. There was light gauge metal lath on corner over fiberglass reinforcing 

mesh in lamina. The metal lath appeared to be used as a casing bead and did not wrap or 

reinforce the corner. 

- Reinforcement mesh was green 

- The casing bead and lath feels like galvanized steel 

- Lamina is ¼ inch 

- No corner bead on corners 

- Could not find felt behind the wall 

- Wood sheathing and framing is completely rotted on corners under roof wall intersections 

- Felt is present under durarock on the roof but is not visible on the walls, that may be due to the 

fact it is decayed 

- Materials on wall is durarock cement board 

- Plywood sheathing is 5/8 inch thick 

- N2- wood is completely rotted when corner was exposed, nails are severely rusted and not 

secured 

- N3- Cracks in the lamina at cement board joints

S 

S 

S 

File Number: 2050

S 

S 

S 

File Number: 2049

Cracks in the DEFS system at the 

cement board joints 


This is not at the gable but at the 

soffit and brick wall of the 

kitchen- hole is visible at soffit 

and roof 

File Number: 2059

Cracks in the corner in the DEFS 

allowing water into the wall 


Side view of the lamina 

illustrating the thickness and 

reinforcement mesh 

The reinforcement mesh is not 

properly encapsulated in the 

basecoat 

File Number: 2065

Metal casing beads were used at 

the corners of the DEFS system 

but did not wrap the corner 

therefore the corners were not 

reinforced 


Large gap into the wall at the 

roof/wall termination where the 

kickout flashing is missing 

File Number: 0724

Overview of the area previously 

noted 


Bottom of the DEFS system was 

falling off the wall above the 

column, the framing and 

plywood sheathing were wet and 

rotted 

This was under the roof/wall 

intersection 

File Number: 2073

The corner of the DEFS was 

damaged where it was used as a 

roof, the framing and sheathing 

were wet and rotted 


No drip edge flashing under the 

shingles at the soffit, the caulking 

applied between the soffit and 

shingles had failed 

File Number: 0732

S 

S 

S 

S 


Gateway to Golf Gable 

- no kickout installed at roof wall intersection 

- the corner seams have opened up, no mesh wrapping the corners 

- plywood sheathing was measured, it is 5/8 inch thick 

- screws secure the cement board, they came through sheathing 

- ¼ inch end are spaced about every 12 inches

S 

S 

S 

S 

File Number: 2057

S 

S 

S 

S 

File Number: 2056

Plywood was water damaged at 

the corners of the DEFS system 


Looking up at the roof the DEFS 

roof and DEFS wall intersection 

demonstrating the water 

damage at the plywood 

File Number: 2148

Plywood is water damaged at 

corner of the DEFS system, wood 

framing appears sound 


Close-up view of water damage 

to the plywood 

File Number: 2154

Looking up at the roof the DEFS 

roof and DEFS wall intersection 

demonstrating the water 

damage at the plywood. 

This roof plywood looks in better 

shape 


Photo of the cement board 

fastener screw penetrating the 

plywood 

File Number: 2158

S 

Soft 

under 

missing 

kickout 

site 

S 


Welcome to Golf Gable 

- no kickout installed at roof wall intersection 

- the corner seams have opened up, no mesh wrapping the corners 

- plywood sheathing was measured, it is 5/8 inch thick 

- screws secure the cement board, they came through sheathing 

- ¼ inch end are spaced about every 12 inches

S 

S 

File Number: 2192

S 

S 

File Number: 2187

Crack in the corner of the DEFS 

system 


File Number:

TAB-7 

BASIS OF DESIGN EIFS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

OUTSULATION ® PLUS MD 

SYSTEM ® 

An Exterior Wall Insulation and Finish System With Moisture Drainage 

That Incorporates Continuous Insulation and An Air/Water-Resistive Barrier 

DS137 

Outsulation Plus MD System 

Specifications

Outsulation Plus MD System Specifications 

DS137 

INTRODUCTION 

This document contains the Manufacturer’s Standard Specification for the Outsulation Plus MD System. These 

specifications follow the Construction Specification Institute’s 3-part format. 

TAILORING THE DRYVIT MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATIONS TO YOUR PROJECT. 

These specifications cover all the common ways of using the Outsulation Plus MD System. Most projects use 

only a few of the possible combinations of these materials and methods. To tailor the specifications to your 

project, simply use those sections which apply. Also, it may be prudent to place certain parts of the Dryvit 

Outsulation Plus MD Specification in other parts of the project’s total specification, such as sealants and 

framing. The project design professionals are responsible for ensuring that the project specifications are 

suitable for the project. For assistance in preparing your specification, contact your Dryvit Distributor or Dryvit 

Systems, Inc. 

UNITS 

English Units are included in parentheses after the Standard International (SI) equivalents thus: 

12.7 mm (1/2 in) 16 Kg/m 3 (1.0 pcf) 

Please note that the conversions may not be exact but rather represent commonly used equivalents. 

WARNING 

The Outsulation Plus MD System is designed as a drainage wall system and is detailed to discharge incidental 

moisture from within the System. Specifications should be followed and proper details adhered to, in order to 

prevent water intrusion, resulting in possible damage to the System or other building elements. Care should be 

taken to insure that all building envelope elements, including without limitations, roof designs, windows, 

flashings, sealants, etc., are compatible with this system. 

DISCLAIMER 

Information contained in this specification conforms to standard detail and product recommendations for the 

installation of the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System products as of the date of publication of this document and 

is presented in good faith. Dryvit Systems, Inc. assumes no liability, expressed or implied, as to the 

architecture, engineering or workmanship of any project. To insure that you are using the latest, most complete 

information, visit our website at www.dryvit.com or contact Dryvit Systems, Inc., at 

One Energy Way 

West Warwick, RI 02893 

(401) 822-4100 

FAX: (401) 822-1980 

* The Trained Contractor Certificate referenced in Section 1.06.A.2 and 1.06.A.4 indicates certain employees of 

the company have been instructed in the proper application of Dryvit products and have received copies of 

Dryvit’s Application Instructions and Specifications. The Trained Contractor Program is not an apprenticeship or 

endorsement. Each trained contractor is an independent company experienced in the trade and bears 

responsibility for its own workmanship. Dryvit Systems, Inc. assumes no liability for the workmanship of a 

trained contractor. 

2


DS137 

DRYVIT SYSTEMS, INC. 

MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATION 

SECTION 07240 

OUTSULATION® PLUS MD SYSTEM 

EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM CLASS PB 

PART I GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY 

A. This document is to be used in preparing specifications for projects utilizing the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD 

System. For complete product description and usage refer to: 

1. Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Data Sheet, DS445. 

2. Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Application Instructions, DS218. 

3. Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110. 

B. Related Sections 

1. Unit Masonry – Section 04200 

2. Concrete – Sections 03300 and 03400 

3. Light Gauge Cold Formed Steel Framing – Section 05400 

4. Wood Framing – Section 06100 

5. Sealant – Section 07900 

6. Flashing – Section 07600 

1.02 REFERENCES 

A. Section Includes 

1. ASTM B 117 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6061) Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray 

(Fog) Apparatus 

2. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 

3. ASTM C 297 Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions 

4. ASTM C 1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing 

5. ASTM C 1396 (formerly C 79) Standard Specification for Gypsum Board 

6. ASTM D 968 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6191) Standard Test Methods for Abrasion 

Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive 

7. ASTM D 2247 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6201) Standard Practice for Testing Water 

Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity 

8. ASTM D 2898 Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for 

Fire Testing 

9. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior 

Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 

10. ASTM D 4060 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser 

11. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 

12. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 

13. ASTM E 119 Standard Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials 

14. ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, 

Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen 

15. ASTM E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors and Curtain Walls by 

Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 

16. ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls 

by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference 

17. ASTM E 2098 Test Method for Determining the Tensile Breaking Strength of Glass Fiber Reinforcing 

Mesh for use in Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), after Exposure to Sodium 

Hydroxide Solution 

18. ASTM E 2134 Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of Exterior Insulation and 

Finish Systems (EIFS) 

19. ASTM E 2178 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 

20. ASTM E 2273 Test Method for Determining the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior Insulation and Finish 

Systems (EIFS) Clad Wall Assemblies 

21. ASTM E 2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies 

22. ASTM E 2430 Standard Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Thermal Insulation Boards for use 

in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) 

23. ASTM E 2485 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.01) Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of 

Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water-Resistive Barrier Coatings 

3


DS137 

24. ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.86) Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and 

PI Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) 

25. ASTM G 155 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6151) Standard Practice for Operating-Xenon Arc 

Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials 

26. DS131, Dryvit Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board Specification 

27. DS151, Custom Brick Polymer System Specifications for Use On Vertical Walls 

28. DS152, Dryvit Cleaning and Recoating 

29. DS153, Dryvit Expansion Joints and Sealants 

30. DS159, Dryvit Water Vapor Transmission 

31. DS456, Rapidry DM 35-50 or DS457, Rapidry DM 50-75 Data Sheets 

32. DS494, Dryvit AquaFlash® System 

33. DS704, Backstop® DMS 

34. DS705, Reflectit 

35. DS706, Mojave E Finish 

36. Mil Std E5272 Environmental Testing 

37. Mil Std 810B Environmental Test Methods 

38. NFPA 268 Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant 

Heat Energy Source. 

39. NFPA 285 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Non- 

Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-Scale, 

Multistory Test Apparatus 

40. ANSI FM 4880 Evaluating Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Assemblies; Plastic Interior Finish 

Materials; Plastic Exterior Building Panels; Wall/Ceiling Coating Systems; Interior or Exterior Finish 

Systems 

1.03 DEFINITIONS 

A. Base Coat: Material used to encapsulate one or more layers of reinforcing mesh fully embedded that is 

applied to the outside surface of the EPS. 

B. Building Expansion Joint: A joint through the entire building structure designed to accommodate structural 

movement. 

C. Contractor: The contractor that installs the Outsulation Plus MD System to the substrate. 

D. Dryvit: Dryvit Systems, Inc., the manufacturer of the Outsulation Plus MD System, a Rhode Island 

corporation. 

E. Expansion Joint: A structural discontinuity in the Outsulation Plus MD System. 

F. Finish: An acrylic-based coating, available in a variety of textures and colors that is applied over the base 

coat. 

G. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation board, which is affixed to the substrate and creates 

a layer of continuous insulation. 

H. Panel Erector: The contractor who installs the panelized Outsulation Plus MD System. 

I. Panel Fabricator: The contractor who fabricates the panelized Outsulation Plus MD System. 

J. Reinforcing Mesh: Glass fiber mesh(es) used to reinforce the base coat and to provide impact resistance. 

K. Sheathing: A substrate in sheet form. 

L. Substrate: The material to which the Outsulation Plus MD System is affixed. 

M. Substrate System: The total wall assembly including the attached substrate to which the Outsulation Plus MD 

System is affixed. 

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. General: The Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System is an Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS), Class 

PB, consisting of an air/water-resistive barrier, an adhesive, expanded polystyrene insulation board, base 

coat, reinforcing mesh(es) and finish. 

B. Methods of Installation: 

1. Field Applied: The Outsulation Plus MD System is applied to the substrate system in place. 

2. Panelized: The Outsulation Plus MD System is shop-applied to the prefabricated wall panels. 

C. Design Requirements: 

1. Acceptable substrates for the Outsulation Plus MD System shall be: 

a. Exterior grade gypsum sheathing meeting ASTM C 1396 (formerly C 79) requirements for water 

resistant core or Type X core at the time of application of the Outsulation Plus MD System. 

b. Exterior sheathing having a water-resistant core with fiberglass mat facers meeting ASTM C 1177. 

c. Exterior fiber reinforced cement or calcium silicate boards. 

d. APA Exterior or Exposure 1 Rated Plywood, Grade C-D or better, nominal 12.7 mm (1/2 in) minimum 

4-ply. 

4


DS137 

e. Exterior grade fire retardant treated (FRT) plywood. 

f. APA Exposure 1 Rated Oriented Strand Board (OSB) nominal 11.1 mm (7/16 in) minimum 

g. Unglazed brick, cement plaster, concrete or masonry. 

2. Deflection of the substrate systems shall not exceed 1/240 times the span. 

3. The substrate shall be flat within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) in a 1.2 m (4 ft) radius. 

4. The slope of inclined surfaces shall not be less than 6:12, and the length shall not exceed 305 mm 

(12 in). 

5. All areas requiring an impact resistance classification higher than "standard", as defined by ASTM E 2486 

(formerly EIMA Standard 101.86), shall be as detailed in the drawings and described in the contract 

documents. Refer to Section 1.04.D.1.d of this specification. 

6. Expansion Joints: 

a. Design and location of expansion joints in the Outsulation Plus MD System is the responsibility of the 

project designer and shall be noted on the project drawings. As a minimum, expansion joints shall be 

placed at the following locations: 

1) Where expansion joints occur in the substrate system. 

2) Where building expansion joints occur. 

3) At floor lines in wood frame construction. 

4) At floor lines of non-wood framed buildings where significant movement is expected. 

5) Where the Outsulation Plus MD System abuts dissimilar materials. 

6) Where the substrate type changes. 

7) Where prefabricated panels abut one another. 

8) In continuous elevations at intervals not exceeding 23 m (75 ft). 

9) Where significant structural movement occurs, such as changes in roof line, building shape or 

structural system. 

7. Terminations: 

a. Prior to applying the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System, wall openings shall be treated with Dryvit 

AquaFlash System or Flashing Tape. Refer to Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD Installation Details (DS110). 

b. The Outsulation Plus MD System shall be held back from adjoining materials around openings and 

penetrations such as windows, doors, and mechanical equipment a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 in) for 

sealant application. See Dryvit’s Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110. 

c. The system shall be terminated a minimum of 203 mm (8 in) above finished grade. 

d. Sealants 

1) Shall be manufactured and supplied by others. 

2) Shall be compatible with the Outsulation Plus MD System materials. Refer to current Dryvit 

Publication DS153 for listing of sealants tested by sealant manufacturer for compatibility. 

3) The sealant backer rod shall be closed cell. 

8. Vapor Retarders: The use and location of vapor retarders within a wall assembly is the responsibility of the 

project designer and shall comply with local building code requirements. The type and location shall be 

noted on the project drawings and specifications. Vapor retarders may be inappropriate in certain 

climates and can result in condensation within the wall assembly. Refer to Dryvit Publication DS159 for 

additional information. 

9. Dark Colors: The use of dark colors must be considered in relation to wall surface temperature as a 

function of local climatic conditions. Use of dark colors in high temperature climates can affect the 

performance of the system. 

10. Flashing: Shall be provided at all roof-wall intersections, windows, doors, chimneys, decks, balconies and 

other areas as necessary to prevent water from entering behind the Outsulation Plus MD System. 

5


D. Performance Requirements: 

1. The Outsulation Plus MD System shall have been tested as follows: 

a. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Coating 

DS137 

TEST TEST METHOD CRITERIA RESULTS 

Tensile Bond ASTM C 297/E 2134 

ICC ES (AC 212)* 

Minimum 104 kPa (15 

psi) 

Substrate: 

Minimum 131 kPa (19 psi) 

(Backstop NT) 

Minimum 166 kPa (24.1 psi) 

(Backstop DMS) 

Flashing 


(Backstop NT) 


(Backstop DMS) 

Freeze-thaw ASTM E 2485/ICC-ES Proc. 


No deleterious effects 

after 10 cycles 

Passed - No deleterious effects 


Water Resistance ASTM D 2247 



after 14 days exposure 1 

No deleterious effects after 

14 days exposure 

Water Vapor 

Transmission 

ASTM E 96 Proc. B 


Vapor Permeable 7 perms (Backstop NT) 2 

30 perms (Backstop DMS) 

Air Leakage ASTM E 283 No ICC or ANSI/EIMA 0.01 l/sec/m 2 (0.002 cfm/ft 2 ) 

Criteria 

Air Permeance ASTM E 2178 No ICC or ANSI/EIMA 

Criteria 

Air Barrier Assembly ASTM E 2357 No ICC or ANSI/EIMA 

Criteria 

Structural 

Performance 

ASTM E 1233 Proc. A 


Racking ASTM E 72 


Restrained 

Environmental 

Water Penetration 

Weathering 

UV Exposure 

ICC-ES Procedure 


ASTM E331 


ICC ES Proc. 

ICC ES (AC212)* 

Minimum 10 positive 

cycles at 1/240 

deflection; No cracking in 

field, at joints or interface 

with flashing 

No cracking in field, at 

joints or interface with 

flashing at net deflection 

of 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) 

5 cycles; No cracking in 

field, at joints or interface 

with flashing 

No water penetration 

beyond the inner-most 

plane of the wall after 

15 minutes at 137 Pa 

(2.86 psf) 

210 hours of exposure 

(Backstop NT) 

0.0006 l/s/m 2 @ 75Pa 

(1.2x10 -4 cfm/ft 2 @ 1.6 psf) 

(Backstop NT) 

0.05 l/sec m 2 @300 Pa 

(


b. Durability 

7 

DS137 


Abrasion Resistance ASTM D 968 No deleterious effects 

after 500 liters 

(528 quarts) 


after 1000 liters 

(1056 quarts) 

Accelerated 

Weathering 

ASTM G 155 Cycle 1 No deleterious effects 

after 2000 hours 



ASTM G 154 Cycle 1 (QUV) 



Freeze-Thaw ASTM E 2485 

(formerly EIMA 101.01) 



Passed - No deleterious 

effects after 90 cycles 

ASTM C 67 modified No deleterious effects 




ASTM E 2485/ICC-ES Proc. 

ICC ES (AC235)*** 





Mildew Resistance ASTM D 3273 No growth during 28 day 

exposure period 

No growth during 60 day 

exposure period 

Water Resistance ASTM D 2247 No deleterious effects 

after 14 days exposure 


after 42 days exposure 

Taber Abrasion ASTM D 4060 N/A Passed 1000 cycles 

Salt Spray 

Resistance 

ASTM B 117 


after 300 hours exposure 



Water Penetration ASTM E 331 

ICC ES (AC 235)*** 

No water penetration 

beyond the inner-most 

plane of the wall after 

15 minutes at 137 Pa 

(2.86 psf) 

exposure 

Passed 15 minutes at 

137 Pa (2.86 psf) 

Water Vapor 

ASTM E 96 Procedure B Vapor permeable EPS 5 perm-inch 

Transmission 

Base Coat* 40 Perms 

Finish** 40 Perms 

Drainage Efficiency ASTM E 2273 

Minimum Drainage Passed 

ICC ES (AC 235)*** 

Efficiency of 90% 

* Base Coat perm value based on Dryvit Genesis® 

** Finish perm value based on Dryvit Quarzputz 

*** AC 235 – Acceptance Criteria for EIFS Clad Drainage Wall Assemblies 

c. Structural 


Tensile Bond ASTM C 297/E 2134 Minimum 104 kPa (15 psi) – Minimum 213.6 kPa (31 psi) 

substrate or insulation failure 

Transverse Wind Load ASTM E 330 Withstand positive and negative 

wind loads as specified by the 

building code 

Minimum 4.3 kPa (90 psf)* 

16 inch o.c. framing, ½ in 

sheathing screw attached at 

203 mm (8 inch) o.c. 

* All Dryvit components remain intact – for higher wind loads contact Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

d. Impact Resistance: In accordance with ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Standard 101.86): 

Reinforcing Mesh 1 /Weight Minimum Tensile EIMA Impact EIMA Impact Range Impact Test Results 

g/m² (oz/yd²) 

Strengths Classification Joules (in-lbs) Joules (in-lbs) 

Standard - 146 (4.3) 27 g/cm (150 lbs/in) Standard 3-6 (25-49) 4 (36) 

Standard Plus TM - 203 (6) 36 g/cm (200 lbs/in). Medium 6-10 (50-89) 6 (56) 

Intermediate - 407 (12) 54 g/cm (300 lbs/in). High 10-17 (90-150) 12 (108) 

Panzer® 15* - 509 (15) 71 g/cm (400 lbs/in). Ultra High >17 (>150) 18 (162) 

Panzer 20* - 695 (20.5) 98 g/cm (550 lbs/in). Ultra High >17 (>150) 40 (352) 

Detail Short Rolls - 146 (4.3) 27 g/cm (150 lbs/in). n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 

Corner Mesh - 244 (7.2) 49 g/cm (274 lbs/in). n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 

*Shall be used in conjunction with Standard Mesh (recommended for areas exposed to high traffic). 

1. It shall be colored blue for product identification bearing the Dryvit logo.


e. Fire performance 

DS137 


Fire Resistance ASTM E 119 No effect on the fire resistance Passed 1 hour 

of a rated wall assembly 

Ignitability NFPA 268 No ignition at 12.5 kw/m 2 at Passed 

20 minutes 

Intermediate Multi- 

Story Fire Test 

NFPA 285 (UBC 26-9) 1. Resist flame propagation over 

the exterior surface 

2. Resist vertical spread of flame 

within combustible 

core/component of panel 

from one story to the next 

3. Resist vertical spread of flame 

over the interior surface from 

one story to the next 

4. Resist lateral spread of flame 

from the compartment of fire 

Passed 

Full Scale Multi-Story* ANSI FM 4880 

(corner test) 

* Dryvit FM Products must be specified 

2. The Outsulation Plus MD components shall be tested for: 

a. Fire 

origin to adjacent spaces 

Resist flame propagation over 

the exterior surface 

Passed; No height 

restrictions* 


Surface 

Burning 

Characteristics 

ASTM E 84 All components shall have a: 

Flame Spread < 25 

Smoke Developed < 450 

Passed 

b. Durability 


Reinforcing Mesh 

Alkali Resistance of 

Reinforcing Mesh 

EPS (Physical Properties) 

Density 

ASTM E 2098 (formerly 

EIMA 105.01) 

ASTM C 303, D 1622 

> 21dN/cm (120 pli) retained 

tensile strength after exposure 

15.2-20.0 kg/m 3 (0.95-1.25 lb/ft 3 ) 

Passed 

Pass 

Thermal Resistance 

Water Absorption 

Oxygen Index 

Compressive Strength 

Flexural Strength 

Flame Spread 

Smoke Developed 

ASTM C 177, C 518 

ASTM C 272 

ASTM D 2863 

ASTM D 1621 Proc. A 

ASTM C 203 

ASTM E 84 

4.0 @ 4.4 °C (40 °F) 

3.6 @ 23.9 °C (75 °F) 

2.5 % max. by volume 

24% min. by volume 

69 kPa (10 psi) min. 

172 kPa (25 psi) min. 

25 max. 

450 max. 

Pass 

Pass 

Pass 

Pass 

Pass 

Pass 

Pass 

Pass 

1.05 SUBMITTALS 

A. Product Data: The contractor shall submit to the owner/architect the manufacturer’s product data sheets 

describing products, which will be used on this project. 

B. Shop Drawings for Panelized Construction: The panel fabricator shall prepare and submit to the 

owner/architect complete drawings showing: wall layout, connections, details, expansion joints, and 

installation sequence. 

C. Samples: The contractor shall submit to the owner/architect two (2) samples of the Outsulation Plus MD 

System for each finish, texture and color to be used on the project. The same tools and techniques proposed 

for the actual installation shall be used. Samples shall be of sufficient size to accurately represent each color 

and texture being utilized on the project. 

D. Test Reports: When requested, the contractor shall submit to the owner/architect copies of selected test 

reports verifying the performance of the Outsulation Plus MD System. 

8


DS137 

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Qualifications 

1. System Manufacturer: Shall be Dryvit Systems, Inc. All materials shall be manufactured or sold by Dryvit 

and shall be purchased from Dryvit or its authorized distributors. 

a. Materials shall be manufactured at a facility covered by a current ISO 9001:2008 and ISO 14001:2004 

certification. Certification of the facility shall be done by a registrar accredited by the American 

National Standards Institute, Registrar Accreditation Board (ANSI-RAB). 

2. Contractor: Shall be knowledgeable in the proper installation of the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System 

and shall be experienced and competent in the installation of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems. 

Additionally, the contractor shall possess a current Outsulation Plus MD System Trained Contractor 

Certificate* issued by Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

3. Insulation Board Manufacturer: Shall be listed by Dryvit Systems, Inc., shall be capable of producing the 

Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) in accordance with the current Dryvit Specification for Insulation Board, 

DS131, and shall subscribe to the Dryvit Third Party Certification and Quality Assurance Program. 

4. Panel Fabricator: Shall be a contractor experienced and competent in the fabrication of architectural wall 

panels and shall possess a current Outsulation Plus MD System Trained Contractor Certificate* issued by 

Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

5. Panel Erector: Shall be experienced and competent in the installation of architectural wall panel systems 

and shall be: 

a. The panel fabricator or 

b. An erector approved by the panel fabricator or 

c. An erector under the direct supervision of the panel fabricator 

B. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. The EPS shall be separated from the interior of the building by a minimum 15-minute thermal barrier. 

2. The use and maximum thickness of EPS shall be in accordance with the applicable building code(s). 

C. Certification 

1. The Outsulation Plus MD System shall be recognized for the intended use by the applicable building 

code(s). 

D. Mock-Up 

1. The contractor shall, before the project commences, provide the owner/architect with a mock-up for 

approval. 

2. The mock-up shall be of suitable size as required to accurately represent the products being installed, as 

well as each color and texture to be utilized on the project. 

3. The mock-up shall be prepared with the same products, tools, equipment and techniques required for the 

actual applications. The finish used shall be from the same batch that is being used on the project. 

4. The approved mock-up shall be available and maintained at the jobsite. 

5. For panelized construction, the mock-up shall be available and maintained at the panel fabrication 

location. 

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. All Dryvit materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with labels intact. 

B. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for physical damage, freezing or overheating. Questionable 

materials shall not be used. 

1. Materials shall be stored at the jobsite in a cool, dry location, out of direct sunlight, protected from weather 

and other sources of damage. Minimum storage temperature shall be as follows: 

a. Demandit®, and Revyvit®: 7 °C (45 °F) 

b. Ameristone, TerraNeo®, Lymestone, and Reflectit: 10 °C (50 °F) 

c. DPR, PMR and E Finishes, Color Prime, Primus®, Genesis® and NCB: 4 °C (40 °F) 

d. Custom Brick Finish: refer to Custom Brick Polymer Specification, DS151. 

e. For other products, refer to specific product data sheets. 

2. Maximum storage temperature shall not exceed 38 °C (100 °F). NOTE: Minimize exposure of materials 

to temperatures over 32 °C (90 °F). Finishes exposed to temperatures over 43 °C (110 °F) for even 

short periods may exhibit skinning, increased viscosity and should be inspected prior to use. 

C. Protect all products from inclement weather and direct sunlight. 

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Requirements 

1. Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is 

provided. Protect materials from inclement weather until they are completely dry. 

9


10 

DS137 

2. At the time of application, the minimum air and wall surface temperatures shall be as follows: 

a. Demandit®, and Revyvit®: 7 °C (45 °F) 

b. Ameristone, TerraNeo®, Lymestone, and Reflectit: 10 °C (50 °F) 

c. DPR, PMR and E Finishes, Color Prime, Primus Genesis and NCB: 4 °C (40 °F) 

d. Custom Brick Finish: refer to Custom Brick Polymer Specification, DS151. 

e. For other products, refer to specific product data sheets. 

3. These temperatures shall be maintained with adequate air ventilation and circulation for a minimum of 

24 hours (48 hours for Ameristone, TerraNeo and Lymestone) thereafter, or until the products are 

completely dry. Refer to published product data sheets for more specific information. 

B. Existing Conditions: The contractor shall have access to electric power, clean water and a clean work area at 

the location where the Dryvit materials are to be applied. 

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. Installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System shall be coordinated with other construction trades. 

B. Sufficient manpower and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous operation, free of cold joints, 

scaffold lines, texture variations, etc. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Dryvit Systems, Inc. shall provide a written moisture drainage and limited materials warranty against defective 

material upon written request. Dryvit shall make no other warranties, expressed or implied. Dryvit does not 

warrant workmanship. Full details are available from Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

B. The applicator shall warrant workmanship separately. Dryvit shall not be responsible for workmanship 

associated with installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System. 

1.11 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY 

A. It is the responsibility of both the specifier and the purchaser to determine if a product is suitable for its 

intended use. The designer selected by the purchaser shall be responsible for all decisions pertaining to 

design, detail, structural capability, attachment details, shop drawings and the like. Dryvit has prepared 

guidelines in the form of specifications, installation details, and product sheets to facilitate the design process 

only. Dryvit is not liable for any errors or omissions in design, detail, structural capability, attachment details, 

shop drawings, or the like, whether based upon the information prepared by Dryvit or otherwise, or for any 

changes which purchasers, specifiers, designers, or their appointed representatives may make to Dryvit’s 

published comments. 

1.12 MAINTENANCE 

A. Maintenance and repair shall follow the procedures noted in the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System 

Application Instructions, DS218. 

B. All Dryvit products are designed to require minimal maintenance. However, as with all building products, 

depending on location, some cleaning may be required. See Dryvit publication DS152 on Cleaning and 

Recoating. 

C. Sealants and Flashings shall be inspected on a regular basis and repairs made as necessary. 

PART II PRODUCTS 

2.01 MANUFACTURER 

A. All components of the Outsulation Plus MD System shall be supplied or obtained from Dryvit or its authorized 

distributors. Substitutions or additions of materials other than specified will void the warranty. 

2.02 MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: Shall be Type I or II, meeting ASTM C 150, white or gray in color, fresh and free of lumps. 

B. Water: Shall be clean and free of foreign matter. 

2.03 COMPONENTS 

A. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Components: 

1. Dryvit Backstop® NT: A flexible, polymer-based noncementitious water-resistive coating and air barrier 

available in Texture and Smooth. 

2. Dryvit Grid Tape: An open weave fiberglass mesh tape with pressure sensitive adhesive available in 

rolls 102 mm (4 in) wide by 91 m (100 yds) long. 

3. Dryvit Backstop DMS: A sprayable single step water-resistive membrane/air barrier and adhesive. 

NOTE: Backstop DMS is not approved for use over wood based substrates.


DS137 

B. Flashing Materials: Used to protect substrate edges at terminations. 

1. Liquid Applied: An extremely flexible water-based polymer material, ready for use. 

a. Shall be AquaFlash and AquaFlash Mesh 

2. Sheet Type: 

a. Shall be Flashing Tape and Surface Conditioner 

1) Dryvit Flashing Tape: A high density polyethylene film backed with a rubberized asphalt adhesive 

available in rolls 102 mm (4 in), 152 mm (6 in) and 229 mm (9 in) wide by 23 m (75 ft) long. 

2) Dryvit Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner: A water-based surface conditioner and adhesion 

promoter for the Dryvit Flashing Tape. 

C. Dryvit AP Adhesive: A moisture cure, urethane-based adhesive used to adhere the Dryvit Drainage Strip 

and Drainage Track. 

D. Drainage Track: UV treated PVC "J" channel perforated with weep holes, complying with ASTM D 1784 and 

ASTM C 1063. Drainage track usage is limited to the base of the system at finished grade level. All other 

horizontal terminations shall utilize the Dryvit Drainage Strip as shown in Outsulation Plus MD Installation 

Details, DS110. Shall be one of the following: 

1. Starter Trac STWP – without drip edge by Plastic Components, Inc. 

2. Starter Trac STDE – with drip edge by Plastic Components, Inc. 

3. Universal Starter Track by Wind-lock Corporation 

4. Sloped Starter Strip with Drip by Vinyl Corp. 

E. Dryvit Drainage Strip: A corrugated plastic sheet material, which provides drainage. 

F. Adhesives: Used to adhere the EPS to the air/water-resistive barrier, shall be compatible with the waterresistive 

barrier and the EPS. 

1. Cementitious: A liquid polymer-based material, which is field mixed with Portland cement. 

a. Shall be Primus, Genesis or Genesis® FM 

2. Ready mixed: A dry blend cementitious, copolymer-based product, field mixed with water. 

a. Shall be Primus® DM, Genesis® DM, Genesis® DMS, Rapidry DM 35-50 or Rapidry DM 50-75 

G. Insulation Board: Expanded Polystyrene meeting Dryvit Specification for Insulation Board, DS131. 

1. Thickness of insulation board shall be minimum 25 mm (1 in). 

2. The insulation board shall be manufactured by a board supplier listed by Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

H. Base Coat: Shall be compatible with the EPS insulation board and reinforcing mesh(es). 

1. Cementitious: A liquid polymer-based material, which is field mixed with Portland cement. 

a. Shall be Primus, Genesis or Genesis FM 

2. Noncementitious: A factory-mixed, fully formulated, water-based product. 

a. Shall be NCB 

3. Ready mixed: A dry blend cementitious, copolymer-based product, field mixed with water. 

a. Shall be Primus DM, Genesis DM, Genesis DMS, Rapidry DM 35-50 or Rapidry DM 50-75. 

I. Reinforcing Mesh: A balanced, open weave, glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system 

materials. NOTE: Reinforcing meshes are classified by impact resistance and specified by weight and 

tensile strength as listed in Section 1.04.D.1.d. 

1. Shall be Intermediate, Detail and Corner Mesh 

2. Shall be colored blue for product identification bearing the Dryvit logo. 

J. Finish: Shall be the type, color and texture as selected by the architect/owner and shall be one or more of the 

following: 

1. Standard DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water-based, acrylic coating with integral color and texture and 

formulated with DPR chemistry: 

a. Quarzputz® DPR: Open-texture 

b. Sandblast® DPR: Medium texture 

c. Freestyle® DPR: Fine texture 

d. Sandpebble® DPR: Pebble texture 

e. Sandpebble® Fine DPR: Fine pebble texture 

2. E: Water-based, lightweight acrylic coating with integral color and texture and formulated with DPR 

chemistry: 

a. Quarzputz® E 

b. Sandpebble® E 

c. Sandpebble® Fine E 

3. Finish with recycled content: 

a. Mojave E: Water based, 100% acrylic finish containing 20% post consumer recycled content and 

formulated with DPR chemistry. 

11


DS137 

4. FM: Water-based, acrylic coating with integral color and texture, formulated with PMR chemistry: 

a. Sandpebble® FM 

b. Sandpebble® Fine FM 

5. Specialty: Factory mixed, water-based acrylic: 

a. Ameristone: Multi-colored quartz aggregate with a flamed granite appearance. 

b. Stone Mist®: Ceramically colored quartz aggregate. 

c. Custom Brick: Acrylic polymer-based finish used in conjunction with a proprietary template system 

to create the look of stone, brick, slate or tile. 

d. TerraNeo: 100% acrylic-based finish with large mica chips and multi-colored quartz aggregates. 

e. Lymestone: A premixed, 100% acrylic-based finish designed to replicate the appearance of limestone 

blocks. 

f. Reflectit: 100% acrylic coating providing a pearlescent appearance. 

6. Elastomeric DPR (Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water- based, elastomeric acrylic coating with integral color 

and texture and formulated with DPR chemistry: 

a. Weatherlastic® Quarzputz 

b. Weatherlastic® Sandpebble 

c. Weatherlastic® Sandpebble Fine 

d. Weatherlastic® Adobe 

7. Medallion Series PMR (Proven Mildew Resistance): Water-based, acrylic coating with integral color and 

texture and formulated with PMR chemistry: 

a. Quarzputz® PMR 

b. Sandblast® PMR 

c. Freestyle® PMR 

d. Sandpebble® PMR 

e. Sandpebble® Fine PMR 

8. Coatings, Primers and Sealers: 

a. Demandit 

b. Weatherlastic® Smooth 

c. Tuscan Glaze 

d. Revyvit 

e. Color Prime 

f. Prymit® 

g. SealClear 

PART III EXECUTION 

3.01 EXAMINATION 

A. Prior to installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System, the contractor shall verify that the substrate: 

1. Is of a type listed in Section 1.04.C.1. 

2. Is flat within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) in a 1.2 m (4 ft) radius. 

3. Is sound, dry, connections are tight; has no surface voids, projections, or other conditions that may 

interfere with the Outsulation Plus MD System installation or performance. 

B. Prior to installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System, the architect or general contractor shall insure that all 

needed flashings and other waterproofing details have been completed, if such completion is required prior to 

the Outsulation Plus MD application. Additionally the Contractor shall ensure that: 

1. Metal roof flashing has been installed in accordance with Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association 

(ARMA) Standards. 

2. Openings are flashed in accordance with the Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110, or 

as otherwise necessary to prevent water penetration. 

3. Chimneys, Balconies and Decks have been properly flashed. 

4. Windows, Doors, etc. are installed and flashed per manufacturer's requirements and the Outsulation Plus 

MD System Installation Details, DS110. 

C. Prior to the installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System, the contractor shall notify the general contractor, 

and/or architect, and/or owner of all discrepancies. 

12


DS137 

3.02 PREPARATION 

A. The Outsulation Plus MD materials shall be protected by permanent or temporary means from inclement 

weather and other sources of damage prior to, during, and following application until completely dry. 

B. Protect adjoining work and property during Outsulation Plus MD installation. 

C. The substrate shall be prepared as to be free of foreign materials, such as oil, dust, dirt, form-release agents, 

efflorescence, paint, wax, water repellants, moisture, frost, and any other condition that may inhibit adhesion. 

3.03 INSTALLATION 

A. The system shall be installed in accordance with the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Application 

Instructions, DS218. 

B. The overall minimum base coat thickness shall be sufficient to fully embed the mesh. The recommended 

method is to apply the base coat in two (2) passes. 

C. Sealant shall not be applied directly to textured finishes or base coat surfaces. Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD 

System surfaces in contact with sealant shall be coated with Demandit or Color Prime. 

D. High impact meshes shall be installed as specified at ground level, high traffic areas and other areas 

exposed to or susceptible to impact damage. 

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper application of the Outsulation Plus MD materials. 

B. Dryvit assumes no responsibility for on-site inspections or application of its products. 

C. If required, the contractor shall certify in writing the quality of work performed relative to the substrate system, 

details, installation procedures, workmanship and as to the specific products used. 

D. If required, the EPS supplier shall certify in writing that the EPS meets Dryvit's specifications. 

E. If required, the sealant contractor shall certify in writing that the sealant application is in accordance with the 

sealant manufacturer's and Dryvit's recommendations. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. All excess Outsulation Plus MD System materials shall be removed from the job site by the contractor in 

accordance with contract provisions and as required by applicable law. 

B. All surrounding areas, where the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System has been applied, shall be left free of 

debris and foreign substances resulting from the contractor’s work. 

3.06 PROTECTION 

A. The Outsulation Plus MD System shall be protected from inclement weather and other sources of damage 

until dry and permanent protection in the form of flashings, sealants, etc. are installed. 




800-556-7752 

www.dryvit.com 

For more information on Dryvit Systems or Continuous Insulation, 

visit these links. 

Printed in USA R17:10-22-12 13 

Dryvit Systems, Inc. 1996

TAB-8 

BASIS OF DESIGN EIFS SYSTEM DATA SHEET

Outsulation ® Plus MD System ® 



Summary 

Dryvit offers a family of performance-based systems that allows 

architects and owners to meet the specific demands of today’s energy 

codes, such as continuous insulation and an air/water-resistive barrier. 

Dryvit’s original Outsulation System has been installed on over 400,000 

buildings worldwide. Due to the increased demands for a wall system to 

be able to drain away incidental moisture, the Outsulation concept has 

grown into a family of related systems, each building upon the other to 

achieve specific performance goals. 

DS445 

System Components 

1. Backstop ® NT Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Coating (available in Texture or Smooth) 

2. Dryvit Grid Tape 

3. Dryvit AquaFlash ® System or Flashing Tape and Surface Conditioner 

4. Dryvit Drainage Track (Shown) or Dryvit Drainage Strip adhered with Dryvit AP Adhesive ® 

5. Dryvit Adhesive in vertical notched trowel configuration 

6. EPS Insulation Boards, creating a layer of continuous insulation 

7. Dryvit Reinforced Base Coat 

8. Dryvit Finish 

Efficient and Economical 

Outsulation Plus MD expands upon the proven weatherability and insulating qualities of Outsulation by adding a 

second line of defense against air, moisture and weather. This is accomplished with a coating of Backstop NT 

and by applying Dryvit’s AquaFlash System or flashing tape at all sills of openings. Outsulation Plus MD goes 

one step further through the use of adhesive channels to provide moisture drainage. These channels work in 

tandem with either of two system termination options, resulting in an efficient and economical system that is 

easy to install. 

Why Backstop NT? 

The adhesive channels present in Outsulation Plus MD will evacuate incidental moisture that may find its way 

behind the insulation board. Backstop NT prevents this moisture from coming into contact with the substrate as 

it drains. Developed specifically for this purpose, it is a specially formulated, flexible, polymer-based, 

noncementitious coating that provides a watertight membrane. Always used in conjunction with a waterproof 

flashing material such as Dryvit AquaFlash System or flashing tape, Backstop NT is an essential element of the 

Outsulation Plus MD System. Full details regarding the performance of Backstop NT are available upon 

request. 

Dryvit...Proven For Over 35 Years 

Dryvit Systems, Inc. is an ISO 9001:2008 and ISO 14001:2004 certified company. ISO standards have been 

established worldwide as a common denominator for product excellence. Dryvit is the recognized leader in 

construction technology. With leadership comes an obligation and commitment to research and development. 

The Outsulation Plus MD System is an example of our determination to continuously evaluate market demands 

and develop new and exciting products. 

Warranty 

Dryvit Systems, Inc. shall provide a written moisture drainage and limited materials warranty against defective 

material upon written request. Dryvit shall make no other warranties, expressed or implied. Dryvit does not 

warrant workmanship. Full details are available from Dryvit Systems, Inc. 



W. Warwick, RI 02893 

(800) 556-7752 


Printed in USA R7:10-22-12 

©Dryvit Systems, Inc. 1998 

Information contained in this product sheet conforms to the 

standard detail recommendations and specifications for the 

installation of Dryvit Systems, Inc. products as of the date of 

publication of this document and is presented in good faith. 

Dryvit Systems, Inc. assumes no liability, expressed or 

implied, as to the architecture, engineering or workmanship of 

any project. To ensure that you are using the latest, most 

complete information, contact Dryvit Systems, Inc.

TAB-9 

BASIS OF DESIGN EIFS SYSTEM INSTALLATION DETAILS

OUTSULATION ® PLUS MD SYSTEM ® 



DS110 


Installation Details

TAB-10 

BASIS OF DESIGN EIFS SYSTEM APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS

OUTSULATION ® PLUS MD 

SYSTEM ® 


That Incorporates Continuous Insulation and An Air-Water-Resistive Barrier 

DS218 


Application Instructions

Outsulation Plus MD System Application Instructions 

DS218 

Table of Contents 

Section I 

Section II 

Section III 

Section IV 

Section V 

Section VI 

Section VII 

Section VIII 

Section IX 

Section X 

Section XI 

Section XII 

Section XIII 

Section XIV 

General Installation Requirements 

Materials Required for Completing Installation of the Outsulation Plus MD 

System 

Mixing Instructions 

Rough Opening Preparation Options 

Substrate Expansion Joint Bridging Options 

Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Application 

Accessories 

Insulation Board Installation 

Installation of Reinforcing Mesh and Base Coat 

Sealant Joint Preparation 

Dryvit Primers 

Dryvit Finish 

Coatings and Sealers 

Maintenance and Repair 

2


DS218 

I. General Installation Requirements 

A. Project Conditions 

1. Storage 

a. Maximum storage temperature shall not exceed 38 °C (100 °F). Minimum storage temperature shall not be 

less than 4 °C (40 °F) with the exception of the following products: 

1) Demandit ® and Revyvit ® : 7 °C (45 °F). 

2) Ameristone, TerraNeo ® , Lymestone, and Reflectit: 10 °C (50 °F). 

3) Custom Brick Finish: refer to Custom Brick Polymer Specification, DS151. 

4) For other products, refer to specific product data sheets. 

2. Application 

a. Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is 

provided. 

b. Protect materials from inclement weather until they are completely dry. 

c. Air and surface temperatures must be 4 °C (40 °F) or above and must remain so for a minimum of 24 hours 

or until dry at the time of Dryvit product application with the exception of the following products: 

1) Demandit ® and Revyvit ® : 7 °C (45 °F). 

2) Ameristone, TerraNeo ® , Lymestone, and Reflectit: 10 °C (50 °F). 

3) Custom Brick Finish: refer to Custom Brick Polymer Specification, DS151. 

4) For other products, refer to specific product data sheets. 

5) These temperatures shall be maintained with adequate air ventilation and circulation for a minimum of 24 

hours (48 hours for Ameristone, TerraNeo and Lymestone) thereafter, or until the products are 

completely dry. Cool, humid conditions may require longer drying times. 

B. Inspection of Substrate 

1. Acceptable substrates for application of the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System are listed in the Dryvit 

Outsulation Plus MD System Specification, DS137. 

2. The substrate must be securely fastened per contract documents. 

3. The substrate attachment method must comply with all contract documents. 

4. The substrate must be clean, dry, structurally sound, free of loose material, voids, projections, hot spots, release 

agents, coatings, or other materials that may affect adhesion. 

5. There shall be no planar irregularities greater than 6.4 mm (1/4 in) within any 1.2 m (4 ft) radius. 

6. Wood based sheathings require a 3.2 mm (1/8 in) gap between adjacent sheets per the guidelines published by 

the APA. 

C. Flashing at System Terminations 

1. General 

a. Ensure that flashing is installed in accordance with applicable code requirements and the contract 

documents. As a minimum, opening preparation is required as shown in the Outsulation Plus MD System 

Installation Details, DS110. 

2. Transition at Roof Lines 

a. Ensure the roof has positive drainage, i.e. all runoff shall be directed to the exterior and away from the 

structure. 

b. Roof flashing (by others) shall be installed in accordance with industry guidelines, manufacturer’s instructions 

and contract documents. 

c. Runoff diverters (i.e. kickouts, crickets and saddles) (by others) shall be installed in accordance with industry 

guidelines, manufacturer's instructions and contract documents. Particular attention must be paid to the 

eaves/chimney intersections and sloped roof/wall intersections. Refer to the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD 

System Installation Details, DS110. 

d. Hold system a minimum of 203 mm (8 in) above flat roofs; 51 mm (2 in) above sloped roofs. 

3. Openings 

a. Heads, jambs and sills of all openings shall be prepared with Dryvit Backstop ® NT, AquaFlash ® , Flashing 

Tape or other approved flashing material selected by the design professional prior to window/door, 

mechanical equipment, or other component installation. For proper application, refer to the Dryvit 

Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110. 

NOTE: Sill piece shall extend to the inside face of wall and continue a minimum of 102 mm (4 in) up at 

the jambs. 

b. Continuous flashing at heads of openings as indicated in contract documents. NOTE: For windows or 

doors that do not have integral flashing, a field-applied flashing shall be installed (by others) in 

accordance with industry guidelines, manufacturer's instructions and contract documents. Refer to 

the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110. 

c. Individual windows that are ganged to make multiple units require the heads to be continuously flashed and 

the joints between the units to be fully sealed. 

3


DS218 

4. Decks and Patios 

a. Wood decks shall be properly flashed prior to system application. See the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD 

System Installation Details, DS110 

b. Verify that the system terminates above poured decks, patios, landings, etc. and that they are properly 

sloped and waterproofed to direct water away from the walls. 

5. Utilities 

a. Provisions must be made to ensure that the system terminates properly at lighting fixtures, electrical outlets, 

hose bibs, dryer vents, etc. Refer to the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110 for 

general information and guidance. 

6. Grade Level Terminations 

a. Hold system a minimum of 203 mm (8 in) above finished grade. 

D. Sealants 

1. Dryvit materials shall be completely dry prior to installation of sealant materials (typically 48 - 72 hours). Humid 

or cool conditions may require longer drying times. 

Notify the general contractor and/or architect and/or owner of all discrepancies. Do not proceed until all 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

II. Materials Required for Completing Installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System 

A. Materials Supplied by Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

1. AquaFlash and AquaFlash Mesh 

2. Backstop NT – Texture and/or Backstop NT – Smooth, or Backstop DMS 

3. Grid Tape 

4. Dryvit Flashing Tape and Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner 

5. AP Adhesive 

6. Drainage Track 

7. Drainage Strip 

8. Starter Strip- optional 

9. Track - optional 

10. Genesis ® , Genesis ® DM, Genesis ® DMS, Primus ® , Primus ® DM, Dryflex ® 

11. NCB 

12. Genesis ® FM 

13. Rapidry DM 35-50, Rapidry DM 50-75, RapidPatch 

14. Standard Mesh, Standard Plus Mesh, Intermediate Mesh, Panzer ® 15, Panzer 20, Corner Mesh, and Detail 

Mesh ® 

a. It shall be colored blue for product identification bearing the Dryvit logo. 

15. Dryvit Finishes 

16. Dryvit Coatings and Primers 

NOTE: Materials listed above are those contained or referenced in the Outsulation Plus MD Specification, 

DS137. Typically the project specification will identify the specific materials necessary to complete 

application. 

B. Materials Supplied by Others 

1. Portland Cement: Type I or II 

2. Clean Potable Water 

3. Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board meeting DS 131 

III. Mixing Instructions 

A. General 

1. No additives such as sand, aggregates, rapid binders, anti-freeze, accelerators, etc. shall be added to any Dryvit 

materials under any circumstances. Such additives will adversely affect the performance of the material 

and void all warranties. 

B. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Materials 

1. AquaFlash 

a. Open the bucket with a utility knife or lid-off. 

b. AquaFlash is ready to use after an initial spin-up using a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, 

powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 450 - 500 rpm. Do not add cement or any other additives. 

2. Backstop NT 


b. Backstop NT is ready to use after an initial spin-up using a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, 

powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 450 - 500 rpm. Do not add cement or any other additives. 

3. Backstop DMS (can also be used as adhesive) 

a. See DS704 for mixing instructions 

C. Adhesive and Base Coat 

1. Primus, Genesis, or Genesis FM 


4


DS218 

b. Due to shipping and storage, there may be some separation of materials. Prior to splitting the material and 

adding Portland cement, mix the material thoroughly. Use a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade 

powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 500 - 1200 rpm only. NOTE: A minimum 7 amp drill works best for 

Portland cement based materials. CAUTION: Do not over-mix or use other types of mixing blades 

as air entrapment and product damage may occur and result in workability and performance 

problems. 

c. Pour 1/2 of the freshly mixed material [approximately 13.5 kg (30 lbs)] into a clean plastic container. 

d. Add 1/3 of a bag [approximately 13.5 kg (30 lbs)] of fresh, lump free Type I or II Portland cement. Either gray 

or white cement is acceptable. Add cement slowly and mix thoroughly. Do not add large quantities of 

cement at one time. 

e. Clean potable water may be added to the mixture to adjust the workability. 

1) Primus 

a) Add as little water as possible, in small increments, and only after the Portland cement is thoroughly 

mixed. Do not over water as this will degrade the performance and promote efflorescence. 

b) Mix the Primus material with Portland cement thoroughly; then wait five (5) minutes and mix again to 

break the initial set. Retempering with a small amount of water is permissible provided the mixture 

has not set. The mixture has a pot life similar to other Portland cement plaster material. Mix only as 

much material as can be conveniently used during a work period. 

2) Genesis and Genesis FM 

a) Add 950 ml (1 qt) of water prior to adding Portland cement. Additional water may be added to adjust 

workability. 

b) Mix the Genesis material with Portland cement thoroughly; then wait ten to fifteen (10-15) minutes and 

mix again to break the initial set. Retempering with a small amount of water is permissible provided 

the mixture has not set. The mixture has a pot life similar to other Portland cement plaster material. 

Mix only as much material as can be conveniently used during a work period. 

2. Primus DM 

a. Pail Mixing 

1) One 22.7 kg (50 lb) bag of material will produce approximately 19 L (5 gal) of Primus DM mixture. Add 

5.7 L (1.5 gal) of clean potable water into a clean plastic container. 

2) Add Primus DM slowly while mixing using a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, powered by a 

12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 500 - 1200 rpm. NOTE: A minimum 7 amp drill works best for Portland 

cement based materials. 

3) Thoroughly mix until uniformly wetted, adjusting consistency with a small amount of water or Primus DM 

material. 

4) Allow the mixture to set a minimum of five (5) minutes then retemper, adding a small amount of water if 

necessary. Material must be free of lumps before using. 

b. Mortar Mixer 

1) Add 5.7 L (1.5 gal) of clean potable water for each 22.7 kg (50 lb) bag of Primus DM into a clean mortar 

mixer. 

2) Add the Primus DM while the mixer is running. Let mix three to five (3 – 5) minutes, shut mixer off for five 

(5) minutes, then run mixer for another two to three (2 – 3) minutes to break the set and add a small 

amount of water if necessary to adjust the workability. The pot life is one to three (1 - 3) hours depending 

on weather. 

3. Genesis DM 


1) One bag of Genesis DM will produce approximately 19 L (5 gal) of Genesis DM mixture. To a clean 19 L 

(5 gal) pail, add 5.7 - 6.6 L (6 - 7 qt) of clean potable water. 

2) Add the Genesis DM slowly while constantly mixing with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, 

powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 500 - 1200 rpm. NOTE: A minimum 7 amp drill works best for 

Portland cement based materials. 

3) Thoroughly mix until uniformly wetted, adjusting consistency with a small amount of water or Genesis DM. 

4) Let set for ten (10) minutes. Retemper, adding a small amount of water if necessary. Material must be 

free of lumps before using. 


1) Add 5.7 - 6.6 L (6 - 7 qt) of clean potable water for each 22.7 kg (50 lb) bag of Genesis DM into a clean mortar 

mixer. 

2) Add the Genesis DM while the mixer is running. Let mix three to five (3 – 5) minutes, shut the mixer off for ten 

(10) minutes, then run mixer for another two to three (2 – 3) minutes to break the set adding a small amount of 

water if necessary to adjust workability. The pot life is one to one and one half (1 – 1 ½) hours depending on 

weather. 

4. Genesis DMS 

a. Sprayer 

1) Connect a source of clean, cool potable water to a spray machine suitable for EIFS applications. 

5


DS218 

2) Regulate the water flow rate to provide the desirable mixing consistency of material. Material may thicken 

up upon leaving the mixing cylinder at a given water flow and loosen up after pumping. NOTE: The 

consistency for application must be determined after pumping. 

b. Pail Mixing 

1) One bag of Genesis DMS will produce approximately 19 L (5 gal) of Genesis DMS mixture. To a clean 

19 L (5 gal) pail, add 6.6 - 8.5 L (7 - 9 qt) of clean, cool potable water. 

2) Add the Genesis DMS slowly while continuously mixing with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing 

blade, powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 500 - 1200 rpm. NOTE: A minimum 7 amp drill works 

best for Portland cement based materials. 

3) Thoroughly mix until uniformly wetted, adjusting consistency with a small amount of water or Genesis 

DMS. 

4) Let set for five (5) minutes. Retemper, adding a small amount of water if necessary. Material must be 

free of lumps before using. 

c. Mortar Mixer 

1) Add 6.6 - 8.5 L (7 - 9 qt) of clean, cool potable water for each 22.7 kg (50 lb) bag of Genesis DMS into a 

clean mortar mixer. 

2) Add the Genesis DMS while the mixer is running. Let mix three to five (3 – 5) minutes, shut the mixer off 

for five (5) minutes, then run mixer for another two to three (2 – 3) minutes. Retemper, adding a small 

amount of water if necessary. Material must be free of lumps before using. The pot life is one to three 

(1 - 3) hours depending on weather. 

5. Rapidry DM 35-50 


1) One 22.7 kg (50 lb) bag of Rapidry DM 35-50 will produce approximately 19 L (5 gal) of Rapidry DM 

35-50 mixture. To a clean Dryvit 19 L (5 gal) pail, add 6.1 L (6.5 qt) of clean potable water. As an 

alternative, on the inside of the Dryvit 19 L (5 gal) pail, draw a horizontal line which measures 113 mm 

(4 7/16 in) from the base of the pail and fill with water. 

2) Add the Rapidry DM 35-50 slowly while mixing with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, 



3) Thoroughly mix until uniformly wetted, adjusting consistency with a small amount of water or Rapidry DM 

35-50 material. Material must be free of lumps before using. 


1) Add 6.1 L (6.5 qt) of clean potable water for each 22.7 kg (50 lb) bag of Rapidry DM 35-50 into a clean 

mortar mixer. 

2) Add the Rapidry DM 35-50 while the mixer is running. Mix for three to five (3 - 5) minutes adjusting 

consistency with a small amount of water or Rapidry DM 35-50. Material must be free of lumps before 

using. The pot life is approximately 30 minutes depending on temperature. 

6. Rapidry DM 50-75 


1) One 20.4 (45 lb) bag of Rapidry DM 50-75 will produce approximately 19 L (5 gal) of Rapidry DM 

50-75 mixture. To a clean Dryvit 19 L (5 gal) pail, add 5.2 L (5.5 qt) of clean potable water. As an 

alternative, on the inside of the Dryvit 19 L (5 gal) pail, draw a horizontal line which measures 97 mm 

(3 13/16 in) from the base of the pail and fill with water. 

2) Add the Rapidry DM 50-75 slowly while mixing with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, 



3) Thoroughly mix until uniformly wetted, adjusting consistency with a small amount of water or Rapidry DM 

50-75 material. 

4) Let set for five (5) minutes. Retemper, adding a small amount of water if necessary. Material must be free 

of lumps before using. 


1) Add 5.2 L (5.5 qt) of clean potable water for each 20.4 kg (45 lb) bag of Rapidry DM 50-75 into a clean 

mortar mixer. 

2) Add the Rapidry DM 50-75 while the mixer is running. Mix for three to five (3 – 5) minutes, shut the mixer 

off for 5 minutes, then run mixer for another two to three (2 – 3) minutes to break the set adjusting 

consistency with a small amount of water or Rapidry DM 50-75. The pot life is approximately 30 minutes 

depending on temperature. 

D. Base Coat only 

1. NCB 


b. Mix NCB to a smooth, homogeneous consistency with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, 

powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 450 - 500 rpm. A small amount of clean potable water may be added 

to adjust workability. 

6


DS218 

2. Dryflex 


b. Due to shipping and storage, there may be some separation of materials. Prior to splitting the material and 

adding Portland cement, mix the material thoroughly. Use a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, 


Portland cement based materials. CAUTION: Do not over-mix or use other types of mixing blades as 

air entrapment and product damage may occur and result in workability and performance problems. 

c. Pour 1/2 of the freshly mixed material [approximately 10.21 kg (22.5 lbs)] into a clean plastic container. 

d. Add 1/4 of a bag [approximately 10.21 kg (22.5 lbs)] of fresh, lump free Type I or II Portland cement. Either 

gray or white cement is acceptable. Add cement slowly and mix thoroughly. Do not add large quantities 

of cement at one time. 

e. Clean potable water may be added to the mixture to adjust the workability. Add as little water as possible, in 

small increments, and only after the Portland cement is thoroughly mixed. Do not over-water as this will 

degrade the performance and promote efflorescence. NOTE: It is advisable to mix the Dryflex 

material with Portland cement thoroughly; then wait five (5) minutes and mix again to break the 

initial set. Retempering with a small amount of water is permissible provided the mixture has not 

set. The mixture has a pot life similar to any Portland cement material. Mix only as much material as 

can be conveniently used during a work period. 

E. Primers 

1. Color Prime, Color Prime - W, Primer with Sand, and Weatherprime ® 

a. Mix material with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 

450 - 500 rpm to a homogeneous consistency. 

F. Finish 

1. Quarzputz ® , Quarzputz ® E, Sandblast ® , Freestyle ® , Sandpebble ® , Sandpebble ® E, Sandpebble ® Fine, 

Sandpebble ® Fine E, Mojave E, Weatherlastic ® Finishes, and DPR FM Finishes. 

a. Thoroughly mix the factory-prepared Dryvit finish with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade powered 

by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 450 - 500 rpm, until a uniform, homogeneous consistency is attained. A small 

amount of clean potable water may be added to adjust workability. Always add the same amount of water to 

each pail within a given lot to avoid color variation. 

NOTE: If using a tint pack to color finish please refer to Tint Pack Mixing Instructions, DS750. 

G. Specialty Finishes 

1. Ameristone 

a. Mix Ameristone for approximately one (1) minute to ensure uniformity using a “Twister” paddle or equivalent 

mixing blade powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 450 - 500 rpm, just prior to application. DO NOT 

OVERMIX. 

b. Mix all pails for the same amount of time. 

c. If clean potable water is added as described in DS142 for various application techniques, the same amount 

must be added to each pail. 

2. Stone Mist ® 

a. Mix Stone Mist for one (1) minute to ensure uniformity using a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, 

powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, 450 - 500 rpm, just prior to application. DO NOT OVERMIX. 

3. TerraNeo 

a. Mix TerraNeo for one (1) minute just prior to application, to ensure uniformity using a “Twister” paddle or 

equivalent mixing blade, powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 450 - 500 rpm. DO NOT OVERMIX. 

4. Lymestone 

a. Mix Lymestone with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 

450 - 500 rpm until a uniform workable consistency is attained. 


5. Custom Brick Finishes 

a. For Custom Brick finishes, refer to Dryvit Custom Brick Application Instructions, DS154, for complete 

mixing instructions. 


6. Reflectit 

a. Refer to Reflectit Data Sheet DS705 and Application Instructions DS124 for complete instructions. 

H. Coatings and Sealers 

1. Demandit, Revyvit, Weathercoat, and Weatherlastic ® Smooth 

a. Mix material with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 

450 - 500 rpm to a homogeneous consistency. 

7


DS218 

2. Tuscan Glaze 

a. Mix Tuscan Glaze with a “Twister” paddle or equivalent mixing blade, powered by a 12.7 mm (1/2 in) drill, at 

450 - 500 rpm to a homogeneous consistency, immediately prior to application. As an alternate, boxing of 

buckets is acceptable. Continuously agitate throughout application to ensure color consistency. 

3. SealClear 

a. Stir material thoroughly before using and stir often during the application process. As an alternate, boxing of 

buckets is acceptable. 

IV. Rough Opening Preparation Options 

A. AquaFlash System Option 

1. AquaFlash must be installed to provide a continuous barrier from the air/water-resistive barrier/sheathing 

substrate onto the framing edges at discontinuities and terminations such as openings, expansion joints, tops of 

parapets, etc. Refer to Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110. 

2. Surface Preparation 

a. Apply only when air and surface temperatures are above 4 °C (40 °F). 

b. The surface to receive the AquaFlash System must be clean, dry, smooth and free of any condition that will 

hinder adhesion. 

c. Clean loose dust or dirt from the surface by wiping with a clean, dry cloth or brush. 

3. AquaFlash System Application 

a. Rough Openings (Windows, Doors, Others) 

1) Cut AquaFlash Mesh to proper length [rough opening plus 102 mm (4 in)] extending 51 mm (2 in) past 

each jamb – Figure 1. 

Figure 1 

2) Begin at the sill of an opening. Using a brush or 19 mm (3/4 in) nap roller, apply a liberal coat of 

AquaFlash Liquid material to the air/water-resistive barrier/substrate surface. NOTE: The AquaFlash 

System must extend to the interior face of the wall opening. 

3) Immediately lay the AquaFlash Mesh into the wet material and brush smooth adding additional material to 

completely embed the mesh - Figure 2. 

Figure 2 

4) Install the AquaFlash System at the jambs in the same manner overlapping onto the sill material a 

minimum of 51 mm (2 in) – Figure 3. 

51 mm 

(2 in) Min. 

Figure 3 

8


DS218 

5) Install the AquaFlash System at the head overlapping the jamb pieces a minimum of 51 mm (2 in) – 

Figure 4. 

51 mm 

(2 in) Min. 

Figure 4 

6) Install diagonal “butterflies” consisting of AquaFlash Liquid and AquaFlash Mesh at each sill/jamb corner 

– Figure 5. 

Figure 5 

7) Allow material to set for approximately 15 minutes then apply a second liberal coat of AquaFlash Liquid 

and smooth out to ensure a continuous film free of voids, pinholes, or other discontinuities. 

4. Sill Pan Flashing (Exposed) 

a. Install a watertight pan flashing at all sill locations - Figure 6. 

b. The flashing shall extend between the framing members of the rough opening and shall be sized to protect 

the sill, sheathing and the surface of the Outsulation Plus MD System. It must include vertical legs at the 

back and sides to ensure proper collection of water. NOTE: All flashing shall be continuous, have 

watertight seams, and shall be configured to shed all water to the exterior of the system. 

c. The flashing shall extend a minimum of 64 mm (2 1/2 in) down over the face of the Outsulation Plus MD 

System - Figure 6. 

64 mm 

(2 1/2 in) Min. 

Figure 6 

5. Sill Pan Flashing (Concealed) for use with nail-on-windows (refer to Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD Installation 

Details, DS110) 

a. Install a watertight pan flashing at all sill locations. 

b. The flashing shall extend between the framing members of the rough opening and shall be sized to protect 

the sill and sheathing. It must include vertical legs at the back and sides to ensure proper collection of 

water. It shall extend a minimum of 102 mm (4 in) below the opening and have a sloped horizontal leg 

which continues over the top edge of the Outsulation Plus MD System. NOTE: All flashing shall be 

continuous, have watertight seams, and shall be configured to shed all water to the exterior of the 

system. 

6. Installation of AquaFlash Over Metal or PVC Flashing Materials 

a. The AquaFlash System may be applied directly over clean galvanized, painted metal, or PVC flashing. 

b. Prepare rough opening as described in Section IV.A.3. 

c. Install flashing material per contract documents. 

d. Clean the surface of the flashing to ensure that it is free of dirt, dust, oil, or other contaminants that may 

interfere with adhesion. NOTE: PVC products should be lightly abraded to break the surface skin and 

provide tooth for the coating. 

9


DS218 

e. Cut AquaFlash Mesh to proper length [flashing plus 102 mm (4 in) extending 51 mm (2 in) beyond each end 

of flashing] - Figure 7. 

Figure 7 

f. Using a brush or 19 mm (3/4 in) nap roller, apply a liberal coat of AquaFlash Liquid material to the flashing 

and adjacent air/water-resistive barrier/substrate surface. 

g. Immediately lay the AquaFlash Mesh into the wet material and brush smooth adding additional material to 

completely embed the mesh. 

h. Allow material to set for 15 minutes then apply a second liberal coat of AquaFlash Liquid and smooth out to 

ensure a continuous film free of voids, pinholes, or other discontinuities and allow to dry. 

B. Dryvit Backstop NT Option 



b. The surface to receive the Backstop NT must be clean, dry, smooth and free of any other condition that will 


c. Remove loose dust or dirt from the surface by wiping with a clean, dry cloth or brush. 

2. Dryvit Backstop NT Application 

NOTE: Backstop NT may be applied to the sill of the opening but it must also be covered with either the 

Dryvit AquaFlash System or Dryvit Flashing Tape. 

a. Rough Openings (Windows, Doors, Others) 

1) Apply Dryvit Grid Tape along the jambs and head of the opening as well as all sheathing joints that may 

intersect the opening and lap onto face of wall a minimum of 51 mm (2 in). Add additional pieces of Grid 

Tape at the inside corners of the opening to maintain continuity – Figure 8. 

Figure 8 

10


DS218 

2) Using a stainless steel trowel apply Backstop NT – Texture over the Grid Tape extending to the inside 

face of the opening and onto the face of the exterior sheathing a minimum of 152 mm (6 in) – Figure 9. 

Figure 9 

3) Apply Dryvit AquaFlash System or Flashing Tape at sill in accordance with Sections IV.A.3 and IV.C 

respectively. NOTE: AquaFlash System or Flashing Tape must extend up the jambs a minimum of 

102 mm (4 in) – Figure 10. 

Figure 10 

4) Install the specified component (i.e. window, etc.) and associated flashings per manufacturer’s directions 

and contract documents. Then apply Backstop NT – Texture or Smooth to the remainder of the wall 

surface as described in Section VI and lap over the previously installed material (do not lap over Flashing 

Tape if specified) around openings – Figure 11. 

11 

Figure 11 

C. Dryvit Flashing Tape Option 

Caution: The Dryvit Flashing Tape and Surface Conditioner must be handled properly. Refer to the 

Material Safety Data Sheets for proper handling, storage, health and environmental considerations. 

NOTE: When Dryvit Flashing Tape is specified for rough opening preparation the air/water-resistive barrier 

must be installed prior to preparing the opening (see Section VI).


DS218 

NOTE: Coordinate the Dryvit Flashing Tape application with the insulation board installation. Apply only 

enough Dryvit Flashing Tape that can be covered with the insulation board in the same work period. 

1. Dryvit Flashing Tape must be installed to provide a continuous barrier from the air/water-resistive 

barrier/sheathing substrate onto the framing edges at discontinuities and terminations such as openings, 

expansion joints, tops of parapets, etc. Refer to Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110. 



b. The surface to receive the Dryvit Flashing Tape must be clean, dry, smooth and free of any condition that will 



3. Dryvit Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner Application 

a. Pour the desired amount of surface conditioner into a clean container to prevent contamination. 

b. Apply to the surfaces, which are to receive the Dryvit Flashing Tape, using a brush or roller. Sufficient 

surface conditioner should be applied to condition the surface to a dust free state suitable for the application 

of the Dryvit Flashing Tape. It should not be applied so heavily that it puddles or runs. Application of excess 

material will not improve adhesion but will extend the drying time. 

c. Allow to dry until the surface is slightly tacky. Low temperatures and high humidity conditions may require 

longer drying times. Conditioning should be limited to areas that can be covered with Dryvit Flashing Tape 

within the same day. 

4. Dryvit Flashing Tape Application 

a. General 

1) Cut the Dryvit Flashing Tape to the appropriate length. Peel the release paper to expose the rubberized 

asphalt adhesive and align the tape into position before touching the wall. 

2) Position the tape on the wall face so that it covers the Backstop NT 51 mm (2 in) and the remainder is 

turned into the opening. 

3) Move along the opening being careful to put the tape as evenly as possible and avoiding fish-mouths 

along the edges. If wrinkles develop, cut out the affected area and replace. 

4) Apply pressure to the tape so that it is firmly in contact with the wall surface. Press the tape into place 

with a hand roller as soon as possible to ensure continuous and intimate contact with the surface. 

5) End laps that occur must maintain a minimum overlap of 51 mm (2 in). 

6) Apply Dryvit Flashing Tape so that it completely covers the stud edges extending to the interior face of the 

opening. Additional strips of Dryvit Flashing Tape may be needed. 

7) Cold weather application may require the use of a heat gun to warm the wall surface in order to obtain 

good initial adhesion. 

b. Sill/jamb intersections and similar conditions 

1) Apply the Dryvit Flashing Tape as shown in the detail below - Figure 12. 

2) Apply sill piece first, then apply the corner splice piece. The jamb piece is applied next, lapping over the 

splice piece. 

Figure 12 

c. Head/jamb intersections 

1) The jamb pieces are applied first, followed by the corner splice pieces. The head piece is applied last. 

d. Lap additional pieces of Dryvit Flashing Tape as necessary to cover the returns to the inside edge of the stud 

or track. 

V. Substrate Expansion Joint Bridging Options 

A. AquaFlash System Option 



b. The surface to receive AquaFlash System must be clean, dry, smooth and free of any condition that will 


12


DS218 


2. AquaFlash System Application 

a. The width of the AquaFlash Mesh must overlap each side of the joint a minimum of 51 mm (2 in) - Figure 13. 

b. Clean the joint to allow for the installation of a backer material. Install a closed cell polyethylene backer rod 

sized a minimum of 50% larger than the joint width. Install so that the backer rod is recessed or projects a 

minimum of 6.4 mm (1/4 in) from the wall surface. 

51 mm 

(2 in) min. 

6. 4 mm 

(1/4 in) Min. 

Recess 

6.4 mm 

(1/4 in) Min. 

Projection 

Figure 13 

c. Using a brush or 19 mm (3/4 in) nap roller, apply a liberal coat of AquaFlash Liquid material to the backer rod 

and adjacent substrate surface to the width of the AquaFlash Mesh - Figure 14. 

Figure 14 

d. Immediately lay the AquaFlash Mesh into the wet material and brush smooth adding additional material to 

completely embed the mesh. 

e. Allow material to set for 15 minutes then apply a second liberal coat of AquaFlash Liquid and smooth out to 

ensure a continuous film free of voids, pinholes, or other discontinuities. 

B. Dryvit Flashing Tape and Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner Option 

NOTE: When Dryvit Flashing Tape is specified for substrate expansion joint bridging, the air/waterresistive 

barrier must be installed prior to preparing the joint (see Section VI). 

NOTE: Coordinate the Dryvit Flashing Tape application with the insulation board installation. Apply only 

enough Dryvit Flashing Tape that can be covered with the insulation board in the same work period. 



b. The surface to receive Dryvit Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner and Dryvit Flashing Tape must be clean, 

dry, smooth and free of any condition that will hinder adhesion. 


2. Dryvit Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner Application 

a. Pour the desired amount of surface conditioner into a clean container to prevent contamination. 

b. Apply to the surfaces, which are to receive the Dryvit Flashing Tape, using a brush or roller. Sufficient 

surface conditioner should be applied to condition the surface to a dust free state suitable for the application 

of the Dryvit Flashing Tape. It should not be applied so heavily that it puddles or runs. Application of excess 

material will not improve adhesion but will extend the drying time. 

c. Allow to dry until the surface is slightly tacky. Low temperatures and high humidity conditions may require 

longer drying times. Conditioning should be limited to areas that can be covered with Dryvit Flashing Tape 

within the same day. 

13


DS218 

3. Position the Dryvit Flashing Tape so that it is centered over the joint. Adhere to one side of the joint, and then 

adhere the adjacent side. Allow enough slack in the tape to account for any joint movement. 

VI. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Application 

A. When using Backstop DMS refer to DS704 

B. Ensure that the wall surface and ambient temperature are above 4 °C (40 °F) and rising at the time of Backstop NT 

application. WARNING: Do not apply the Dryvit materials in the rain. The underlying wall materials and 

substrate surface must be dry prior to applying the air/water-resistive barrier. 

C. Sheathing Substrates 

1. Prior to applying the Backstop NT over a sheathing substrate, check to ensure that: 

a. The sheathing is of a type listed in the Outsulation Plus MD System Specification, DS137. 

b. The sheathing is structurally sound, free of loose material, voids, projections or other conditions that may 

interfere with the installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System. 

c. The sheathing is clean, dry, and free of grease, oil, paint and other foreign material. 

1) Exterior grade gypsum sheathing facing paper shall not show signs of deterioration and shall be firmly 

bonded to the core. 

2) Plywood or OSB moisture content shall not exceed 19% as measured by a probe type moisture meter. 

d. There are no planar irregularities greater than 6.4 mm (1/4 in) within any 1.2 m (4 ft) radius. SHEATHING 

WITH GAPS OR DAMAGE EXCEEDING 6.4 mm (1/4 in) IN ANY ONE DIRECTION MUST BE REPLACED. 

NOTE: Notify the general contractor and/or architect and/or owner of all discrepancies. Do not 

proceed until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

NOTE: OSB sheathing requires that joints and fasteners be treated with Backstop NT - Texture. 

A minimum of two (2) coats of Backstop NT - Smooth are required for the field of the wall. 

Backstop NT - Texture is not recommended for application in the field of the board. 

D. Concrete or Masonry Substrates 

NOTE: Backstop NT - Texture is the only recommended product use over concrete and masonry. 

1. Prior to applying the Backstop NT - Texture over a concrete or masonry substrate, check to ensure that: 

a. All cracks are repaired using appropriate procedures and materials. 

b. The substrate is structurally sound, free of loose material, voids, projections or other conditions that may 

interfere with the installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System. 

c. The substrate is clean, dry, free of grease, oil, paint, form release agents, efflorescence and other foreign 

materials that may inhibit adhesion. 

d. There are no planar irregularities greater than 6.4 mm (1/4 in) within any 1.2 m (4 ft) radius. 

1) Mortar joints that are NOT struck flush or heavily textured masonry units shall be skim coated 

with Dryvit Genesis or Genesis DM prior to the application of Backstop NT - Texture. 

a) Mix Genesis or Genesis DM in accordance with Section III.C.1 or III.C.3, respectively. 

b) With a stainless steel trowel, apply a coat of the Genesis mixture or Genesis DM mixture over the 

substrate to fill the mortar joints and surface texture to provide a uniform smooth surface for the 

application of the Backstop NT - Texture. 

c) Allow the skim coat to completely dry prior to applying the Backstop NT - Texture. 

14


E. Usage Application Chart 

DS218 

Backstop NT - Texture and Backstop NT - Smooth Usage/Application Chart 

Substrate Location Product Tool Approximate Coverage Per Pail e, h 

Joints a Backstop NT - Texture Trowel 91 m (300 lin. ft.) 

Exterior Grade 

Gypsum 

Sheathing 

Face f 

Backstop NT - Texture 

OR 

Backstop NT - Smooth h 

Trowel or 

For both tools 

FoamPRO 

#58 Roller b 23-28 m 2 (250-300 ft 2 ) 

12.7 mm 

(1/2 in) 

46 m 2 (500 ft 2 ) c 

Nap Roller 

Fiberglass 

Faced Exterior 

Gypsum 

Sheathing 


Face f Backstop NT - Texture 

OR 

Trowel 

Backstop NT - Smooth h 19 mm (¾ in) 

Nap Roller 

23-28 m 2 (250-300 ft 2 ) 

[includes joints] 

37 m 2 (400 ft 2 ) c 

Exposure 1 or 

Exterior Grade 

and Fire 

Retardant 

Treated 

Plywood and 

Exterior 

Cement Board 

APA Exposure 

1 Rated 

Oriented 

Strand Board 

(OSB) 


Face f 


OR 

Backstop NT - Smooth h 

Trowel or 

For both tools 

FoamPRO 

#58 Roller b 23-28 m 2 (250-300 ft 2 ) 

12.7 mm 

(1/2 in) 

37 m 2 (400 ft 2 ) c 

Nap Roller 


Face f Backstop NT - Smooth h (1/2 in) 

12.7 mm 

Nap Roller 

33-37 m 2 (350-400 ft 2 ) 

applied in 2 coats 

Concrete 

and 

Masonry 

Face d 


Trowel g 

16.7 m2 (180 ft 2 ) g 

applied in 1 coat 

FoamPRO 

11-14 m 2 (125-150 ft 2 ) g 

#58 Roller b applied in 2 coats 

a Tape the joints with Dryvit Grid Tape prior to application of Backstop NT - Texture at joints and screw heads. 

b Up to 1 pint (16 oz) of water may be added to a 60 lb pail of Backstop NT - Texture for roller or spray applications only. 

The FoamPRO #58 roller cover (FoamPRO Mfg., Inc., www.foampromfg.com) is available at home supply stores. 

c Because of application methodology and absorptive surface differences, two coats may be required to obtain this 

coverage. 

d Due to variations in types of concrete/masonry, apply a 6 ft x 6 ft test area with coverage as indicated in the chart, 

before proceeding with the entire job. If there are voids in the dried BSNT - Texture, particularly at the mortar joints, the 

job should be parged with Genesis ® , 24 hours prior to BSNT - Texture application. Backstop NT shall NOT be used 

as a skim coat for parging CMU joints or heavy textured units. 

e Backstop NT - Texture should be applied at the recommended coverage rates to form a continuous film free of voids at 

a dry film thickness of approximately 12 mils (the approximate diameter of the aggregate component). 

f 

Backstop NT - Texture (with up to 1 pint water addition per 60 lb. pail) or Smooth may be sprayed and 

backtrowelled/backrolled. 

g Coverage may vary depending on the porosity of the substrate. Coverage assumes a smooth, dense surface. 

h At 400 ft 2 /pail, Backstop NT – Smooth achieves a dry film thickness (DFT) of 12 mils when applied in two coats. Each 

coat is applied at a minimum wet film thickness (WFT) of 13 mils. 

Refer to Product Data Sheets for Complete Mixing and Application Instructions 

15


DS218 

F. Application of Backstop NT 

1. Dryvit Grid Tape (not required with concrete and masonry substrates) 

a. For sheathing substrates, apply the Dryvit Grid Tape along all joints in the sheathing, as well as inside 

corners, outside corners, and exposed edges at terminations that will not be covered with Dryvit AquaFlash 

or Dryvit Flashing Tape. 

b. Center the Dryvit Grid Tape on the sheathing joints, edges, etc. with the pressure sensitive adhesive backing 

in contact with the sheathing surface. Press into position with hand pressure until adhesion is achieved. 

c. Apply only enough Dryvit Grid Tape as can be covered with Backstop NT - Texture in the same day. 

2. Dryvit Backstop NT - Texture Application 

NOTE: Backstop NT Texture is NOT recommended for use over the face of OSB. 

a. General: Backstop NT - Texture can be applied using a roller, trowel or spray equipment over the listed 

substrates, as noted in the usage chart above. Backstop NT - Texture should be applied at the 

recommended coverage rate to achieve a continuous film at a minimum dry film thickness of approximately 

0.3 mm (12 mils). 

b. Roller Application 

1) Apply Dryvit Grid Tape as described in Section VI.F.1 above. Mix the Backstop NT - Texture material as 

described in Section III.B.2. Using a stainless steel trowel or spatula, apply a layer of Backstop NT - 

Texture over the Dryvit Grid Tape and spot all fastener heads – Figure 15. NOTE: Dryvit Grid Tape is 

not necessary over fastener heads. 

6.4 mm (1/4 in) Max. 

Sheathing Joints 

Backstop NT - 

Texture 

Dryvit Grid Tape 

Figure 15 

2) Allow to dry for a minimum of 2 hours or until dry to the touch. NOTE: Cool, humid conditions may 

require longer drying times 

a) Because of the absorption characteristics, plywood substrates may require a second pass to fill any 

voids at the sheathing joints. After the first pass has dried, check the joints and spot any voids that 

may be present with additional Backstop NT – Texture material and allow to dry. 

3) Use a coarse, open-cell foam roller cover with a 9.5 mm (3/8 in) foam nap (FoamPRO #58 roller). Apply a 

uniform, continuous film of Backstop NT – Texture over the entire surface of the sheathing, concrete or 

masonry, including the previously treated areas – Figure 16. NOTE: If the roller pulls material back 

out of the sheathing joints, it indicates that the joint material is not sufficiently dry. 

a) For concrete and masonry, ensure that a continuous film of uniform thickness is applied across the 

entire surface and across mortar joints. Minimum 2 coats are required allowing a minimum of 2 hours 

between coats. Cool, damp weather may require longer time between coats. 

- 

Figure 16 

16


DS218 

4) While the Backstop NT - Texture is still wet, using a trowel or spatula, smooth out the Backstop NT - 

Texture around all window and door perimeters and other areas that will later receive Dryvit Flashing 

Tape - Figure 17. 

Figure 17 

5) The Backstop NT - Texture material should be applied in a uniform, continuous film at the recommended 

coverage rate. NOTE: Substrates with a surface texture or high porosity will require additional 

material. 

c. Trowel Application 

1) Apply Dryvit Grid Tape as described in Section VI.F.1 above. Mix the material, as described in 

Section III.B.2, and using a stainless steel trowel or spatula, apply a layer of Backstop NT – Texture over 

the grid tape. Spotting of fasteners is not necessary when applying Backstop NT - Texture using a 

trowel. Allow to dry for a minimum of 2 hours or until dry to the touch. 

2) Using a stainless steel trowel, apply a continuous coating of Backstop NT - Texture material onto the 

entire surface. The material should be applied at a smooth, uniform, continuous film approximately equal 

to the thickness of the aggregate. 

d. Spray/Back-Rolling Application 

1) Apply Dryvit Grid Tape as described in Section VI.F.1 above. Mix the material as described in 

Section III.B.2 and using a stainless steel trowel or spatula, apply a layer of Backstop NT - Texture over 

the grid tape and spot all fastener heads. Allow to dry for a minimum of 2 hours or until dry to the touch. 

2) Because of the absorption characteristics, plywood substrates may require a second pass to fill any voids 

at the sheathing joints. After the first pass has dried, check the joints and spot any voids that may be 

present with additional Backstop NT - Texture material and allow to dry. 

3) Using a hand held hopper gun or other suitable spray equipment; spray a layer of Backstop NT - Texture 

onto the wall surface. Using a coarse, open-cell foam roller cover with a 9.5 mm (3/8 in) foam nap 

(FoamPro #58 roller), roll the material to create a smooth continuous film. NOTE: If the roller pulls 

material back out of the sheathing joints, it indicates that the joint material is not sufficiently dry. 

4) While Backstop NT - Texture is still wet, using a trowel or spatula, smooth out the Backstop NT - Texture 

around all window and door perimeters and other areas that will later receive Dryvit Flashing Tape – 

Figure 17. 

5) Backstop NT - Texture material should be applied in a uniform, continuous film at the recommended 

coverage rate. NOTE: Substrates with a surface texture or high porosity will require additional 

material. 

e. Allow the Backstop NT – Texture to completely dry prior to installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System 

3. Backstop NT - Smooth Application 

a. General: Dryvit Backstop NT - Smooth can be applied using a roller or sprayed and back-rolled over the 

acceptable sheathing substrates. NOTE: OSB sheathing requires that joints and fasteners be 

treated with Backstop NT - Texture. A minimum of two (2) coats of Backstop NT - Smooth are 

required for the field of the wall. Backstop NT - Texture is not recommended for application in 

the field of the board. 

b. Sheathing Substrates: All fastener heads shall be spotted and joints treated with Backstop NT - Texture and 

Dryvit Grid Tape prior to Backstop NT -Smooth application, in accordance with Section VI.F.2. 

c. Roller Application 

1) Using the appropriate nap roller (see Usage Application Chart), apply the Backstop NT - Smooth over the 

entire wall surface, including previously treated joints. NOTE: If the roller pulls material back out of 

the sheathing joints, it indicates that the joint material is not sufficiently dry. 

2) Backstop NT - Smooth material should be applied in a uniform, continuous film at the recommended 

coverage rate. NOTE: Sheathing substrates with a surface texture or high porosity will require 

additional material. 

17


DS218 

Backstop NT - 

Texture 

Backstop NT - 

Smooth 

Figure 18 

d. Spray/Back-Rolling Application 

1) Backstop NT - Smooth may be applied to the wall using spray equipment and back-rolled using the 

appropriate nap roller (see Usage Application Chart). 

2) Allow the Backstop NT – Smooth to completely dry, check the wall to ensure that the Backstop NT - 

Smooth is continuous and touch up any visible voids with additional Backstop NT - Smooth material. 

e. Allow the Backstop NT – Smooth to completely dry prior to installation of the Outsulation Plus MD System. 

VII. Accessories 

A. Installation of the Dryvit Drainage Strip or Drainage Track 

1. Dryvit Drainage Strip (Optional - not required when Drainage Track is specified) 

a. Dryvit Drainage Strip shall be used at the base of the walls and shall be installed at the heads of all 

penetrations and at expansion/control joints as shown in Outsulation Plus MD Installation Details, 

DS110. 

b. Using a chalk line, strike a level line at the base of the wall, head of opening or expansion/control 

joint to use as reference in applying the Dryvit Drainage Strip. 

c. Install the Dryvit Drainage Strip by applying dabs of Dryvit’s AP Adhesive at 305 mm (12 in) on 

center on the dry Backstop NT air/water-resistive barrier. 

d. Position the Dryvit Drainage Strip on the chalk line and press firmly against the substrate to ensure firm 

contact between the adhesive and the wall surface. Staples or other fasteners may be used if necessary to 

maintain position until the insulation board is installed. 

2. Dryvit Drainage Track (Optional - not required when Drainage Strip is specified) 

a. Dryvit Drainage track usage is limited to the base of the system at finished grade level. 

b. Using a chalk line, strike a level line at the base of the wall that coincides with either the top or 

bottom of the nailing flange. 

c. Install the Dryvit Drainage Track by applying a continuous horizontal bead of Dryvit’s AP Adhesive 

on the wall side of the track’s nailing flange. 

d. Position the track on the chalk line and press firmly against the substrate to ensure firm and 

continuous contact between the adhesive and the wall surface. NOTE: Do not overlap tracks, 

they shall be butted tightly. 

e. Secure the track to the wall using corrosion resistant fasteners attached into the underlying framing 

members. NOTE: It is recommended that the surface of the Drainage Track be lightly sanded 

to improve adhesion of Backstop NT or AquaFlash. 

f. Install the AquaFlash System, Backstop NT and Grid Tape or Flashing Tape on the flange of the 

Drainage Track and the adjacent wall in order to ensure water-tightness at the flange/wall interface. 

See Section IV for proper application. 

VIII. Insulation Board Installation 

A. When using Backstop DMS refer to DS704 

B. System Terminations 

1. Attach Detail Mesh around the perimeter of all openings, penetrations, and other system terminations by stapling 

or applying a ribbon of adhesive mixture on the substrate and embedding the Detail Mesh into the wet mixture. 

NOTE: Back wrapping is not required at the base of the wall when using the Dryvit Drainage Track. 

2. Position the Detail Mesh so that a minimum of 64 mm (2 1/2 in) will extend onto the face of the insulation board. 

Keep the mesh, which is not embedded, clean. 

C. Inspection of the Insulation Board 

1. Prior to installing the insulation board, it shall be checked to ensure that: 

18


19 

DS218 

a. It is shipped in a clear polyethylene bag bearing the Dryvit name. In addition, the lot number of the insulation 

board shall be visible on the outside of the bag. Insulation board shall be obtained from Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

or its authorized distributors, and made exclusively by manufacturers listed by Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

b. One edge of each board shall bear the word Dryvit, the plant identification number of the block molder, the 

appropriate model code report number, and the name of the third party quality control agency with 

corresponding number. In addition, one board in each bag shall bear the same markings on the face. 

c. The insulation board measures a maximum of 0.6 m (2 ft) by 1.2 m (4 ft) with a minimum thickness of 19 mm 

(3/4 in). 

d. The insulation board meets the following tolerances: 

1) Length: Plus or minus 1.6 mm (1/16 in). 

2) Width: Plus or minus 1.6 mm (1/16 in). 

3) Thickness: Plus or minus 1.6 mm (1/16 in) for boards greater than 25 mm (1 in), plus 1.6 mm (1/16 in) 

minus 0 for boards less than or equal to 25 mm (1 in). 

4) Squareness: Shall not deviate from square by more than 0.8 mm (1/32 in) in 305 mm (12 in) of total length 

or width. 

5) Edge Trueness: Shall not deviate more than 0.8 mm (1/32 in) in 305 mm (12 in). 

6) Face Flatness: Shall not exhibit any bowing of more than 0.8 mm (1/32 in) in the length. 

WARNING: Any insulation board not meeting the above requirements should be rejected and not 

installed. 

D. Methods of Applying the Dryvit Adhesive 

1. Mix the Dryvit adhesive in accordance with Section III.C 

a. Cementitious Adhesive 

1) Notched Trowel Method 

a) With a notched trowel, 9.5 mm (3/8 in) wide, 12.7 mm (1/2 in) deep notches spaced 38 mm 

(1 1/2 in) apart, apply the adhesive mixture to the backside of the insulation board. Holding the trowel 

at a 45° angle, apply firm pressure to the insulation board in order to scrape the excess adhesive from 

between the adhesive beads. NOTE: Apply the adhesive so that the ribbons run vertically when 

the insulation board is placed on the wall. 

2) Ribbon and Dab Method 

a) Using a stainless steel trowel, install a ribbon of the adhesive mixture, 51 mm (2 in) wide by 

9.5 mm (3/8 in) thick around the entire perimeter of the insulation board. Place eight (8) dabs of the 

adhesive mixture 9.5 mm (3/8 in) thick by 102 mm (4 in) in diameter approximately 203 mm (8 in) on 

center to the interior area of the insulation board. NOTE: The ribbon and dab method of applying 

the adhesive mixture shall not be used, nor is it recognized by the building codes when 

applying the Outsulation Plus System over a sheathing substrate. Installations over a 

sheathing substrate shall use the notched trowel method described above. 

3) Push Box Method 

a) A push box may also be used to install the adhesive mixture on the insulation board. Contact Dryvit 

Systems, Inc. for complete details for construction of a push box. NOTE: Apply the adhesive so 

that the ribbons run vertically when the insulation board is placed on the wall. 

b. Non-cementitious Adhesive 

1) AP Adhesive - recommended for use in limited areas only, such as metal surfaces, including steel lintels, 

metal flashing, etc. 

a) Cut the smallest opening possible in spout (just large enough so adhesive can flow easily when 

gunned). It is intended to be applied in thin beads [approximately 9.5 mm (3/8 in)]. 

2. When using Backstop DMS refer to DS704 

E. Insulation Board Installation 

1. Prior to installing the insulation board, ensure that the surface of the Backstop NT is uniform in thickness, 

continuous, clean, dry and free of any foreign materials that will affect adhesion of the insulation board. 

2. Begin installation of the insulation board from a permanent or temporary support. 

3. When sheathing is used as a substrate, use a 305 mm (12 in) high by 1.2 m (4 ft) long piece of insulation board 

as a starter row at the base of the wall. This will help minimize the insulation board joints from coinciding with 

the sheathing joints. Offset the insulation board joints from the sheathing joints a minimum of 203 mm (8 in) in 

both vertical and horizontal directions. Install the insulation boards with their long edges oriented horizontally. 

4. Apply the adhesive to the insulation board as described in Section VIII.D. 

a. When using Primus, Genesis, Primus DM, Genesis DM, Genesis DMS or Genesis FM as the adhesive, 

butter the edge of the insulation board at all terminations in order to properly embed the previously installed 

Detail Mesh used for back wrapping. Back wrapping is necessary to provide appropriate fire performance 

and to create the proper surface for application of sealant. NOTE: The application of the adhesive 

mixture to the edge of the insulation board is only done when wrapping with the Detail Mesh. 

b. Genesis DMS may be applied to the substrate surface in a vertical notched trowel pattern as described in 

Section VIII.D.1.a.1). Refer to Genesis DMS Data Sheet, DS471.


20 

DS218 

5. Position the insulation board horizontally on the substrate. Press the board gently to the substrate and slide it 

into position. Apply firm pressure over the entire surface of the insulation board to ensure uniform contact and 

high initial grab. 

6. Using a margin trowel, clean the insulation board edges of any adhesive mixture. Ensure that the insulation 

board joints are butted tightly and faces are level and flush. CAUTION: Do not allow adhesive to remain in 

board joints. 

7. Install subsequent rows of insulation board in a running bond pattern (vertical joints staggered). 

8. With factory edges exposed, stagger vertical joints at inside and outside corners. Make sure the corners are 

straight and plumb. 

9. To ensure an overall flat surface, tamp the insulation board surface with a board that overlaps two to four rows 

of insulation. 

10. If for any reason the insulation board joints are not butted tightly, slivers of insulation board must be installed to 

fill any gaps. ALL GAPS GREATER THAN 1.6 mm (1/16 in) MUST BE SLIVERED. Tip: In order to create a 

tight fit, it is recommended that a wider joint be cut with a hot groover or similar tool to allow for a more 

precise fitting sliver. Do not install adhesive on sliver edges. 

11. Windows, Doors, Mechanical Equipment and all Wall Penetrations 

a. Option 1 

1) At openings, align the insulation boards so that the edges (vertical and horizontal joints) do not coincide 

with the corners of the opening (refer to Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110). 

2) Attach Detail Mesh around the perimeter of the opening as described in Section VIII.B. 

3) Hold the insulation board back from the window/door frame or mechanical equipment to allow for 

differential movement, proper system edge preparation, and sealant installation as shown in the Dryvit 

Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110. 

b. Option 2 - Installation of J Track at heads of all openings [length not to exceed 0.3 m (10 ft)]. Tip: It is 

recommended to use a 19 mm (3/4 in) casing bead as manufactured by Plastic Components – item 

numbers 1075 or CB 75-25. 

1) Because insulation board joints cannot align with corners of openings, first cut L-shaped pieces of 

insulation board for the corners of the opening. Then measure and cut the insulation board to the proper 

length to fit between the corner pieces over the opening. Insulation board shall be notched to receive J 

track as shown in the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System Installation Details, DS110. 

2) Mix the adhesive material as described in Section III.C. 

3) Cut the Detail Mesh to a working length. 

4) Apply a ribbon of adhesive mixture on the air/water-resistive barrier/substrate and position the 

Detail Mesh in the wet mixture allowing for a 64 mm (2 1/2 in) minimum overlap onto the face of 

the insulation board. Keep the mesh, which is not embedded, clean. 

5) Apply the adhesive mixture to the backside of the insulation board in accordance with 

Section VIII.D and position on the wall. Press gently and slide into position applying uniform 

pressure to ensure full contact and high initial grab. 

6) Using a margin trowel, remove any adhesive from the edges of the insulation boards that will abut other 

insulation boards. CAUTION: Do not allow adhesive to remain in board joints. Ensure that the 

insulation board joints are abutted tightly, and are level and flush. 

7) Measure and cut J Track so that it extends 152 mm (6 in) beyond the edges of the opening as shown in 

Outsulation Plus MD Installation Details DS110. 

8) Install the J Track by applying a continuous bead of Dryvit AP Adhesive on the wall side of the vertical 

nailing flange of the track and position over the notched insulation board. Press firmly against the 

substrate to ensure firm and continuous contact between the adhesive and the wall surface. 

9) Secure the track to the wall using corrosion resistant fasteners attached into the underlying 

framing members. NOTE: It is recommended that the surface of the track be lightly sanded 

to improve adhesion. 

10.) Install the AquaFlash System, Backstop NT and Grid Tape or Flashing Tape on the flange of the 

J Track and the adjacent wall in order to ensure water-tightness at the flange/wall interface. See 

Section IV for proper application. 

12. Expansion Joints 

a. Attach Detail Mesh around the perimeter of the opening as described in Section VIII.B. 

b. When abutting dissimilar materials, leave a minimum 19 mm (3/4 in) separation between the insulation board 

and abutting material to allow for differential movement, proper system edge preparation and sealant 

installation. 

c. When the Outsulation Plus MD System is installed at a substrate transition, leave a minimum 19 mm 

(3/4 in) separation between the insulation boards to allow for differential movement, proper system edge 

preparation and sealant installation. 

13. IMPORTANT: Once the insulation board and Detail Mesh are in place, wait a minimum of 24 hours prior to 

working on the surface of the insulation board to prevent any movement which may weaken the bond of the


DS218 

adhesive mixture to the substrate. NOTE: Be sure to protect the installed insulation board from rain, 

freezing or inclement weather for a period of 24 hours. 

14. Any irregularities in the insulation board surface must be sanded flat. Sanding is accomplished with a light 

circular motion. The entire wall area must be sanded. Use grade 20 grit sandpaper or coarser, in 

conjunction with hand, electric or air rasps. NOTE: Do not sand parallel to the insulation board joints. 

CAUTION: The contractor shall take precautions to contain EPS dust from rasping operation in 

accordance with contract documents. Use of vacuum rasps are recommended to minimize introduction 

of EPS dust into the environment. 

15. Remove all loose pieces of insulation board and dust from the sanding operation using a brush, broom, or 

compressed air. Use OSHA required masks to protect against inhaling EPS dust. 

16. All Detail Mesh that was previously installed for back wrapping the insulation board shall be embedded in the 

base material mixture at this time. 

a. With a stainless steel trowel, apply any of Dryvit’s cementitious base material mixture to the face (and edge if 

not previously coated) of the insulation board and embed the Detail Mesh in the wet mixture. NOTE: It is not 

recommended to use NCB to embed reinforcing mesh at EPS edges that will receive sealant. 

17. Aesthetic Reveals 

a. To install an aesthetic reveal, snap a straight line using a chalk line to mark the position. 

b. Position a straight edge such as a steel stud or track against the insulation board in the proper location to 

guide the appropriate cutting tool (router, hot knife, or hot groover). CAUTION: The thickness of the 

insulation board in the bottom of the reveal must not be less than 19 mm (3/4 in). 

c. Use Detail Mesh to ensure continuity of reinforcing mesh through aesthetic reveals continuing a minimum of 

64 mm (2 1/2 in) on each side of the reveal. 

1) Apply the base material mixture in the reveal and on the adjacent insulation board surfaces. 

2) Embed the Detail Mesh into base coat mixture on one side of the reveal only. 

3) Use a sled or special tool configured to the profile of the reveal. Embed the Detail Mesh into the base coat 

mixture through the reveal being careful not to cut the mesh. 

4) Embed the Detail Mesh into the base coat mixture on the other side of the reveal. Ensure that the mesh is 

fully embedded and that all excess material is removed from the reveal. 

5) Using a damp brush, smooth out any irregularities in the base coat. 

CAUTION: If the mesh is cut in the reveal, a new piece of mesh must be installed over the cut. 

18. Where Corner Mesh is specified for additional impact resistance at outside corners, the Corner Mesh shall be 

embedded in the base coat mixture and allowed to set prior to installing the overall reinforced base coat 

over the face of the wall. 

19. Corners of all openings such as windows, doors, mechanical equipment and all penetrations shall be reinforced 

with Detail Mesh placed diagonally to the opening as illustrated in Figure 19. 

Figure 19 

IX. Installation of Reinforcing Mesh and Base Coat 

A. General 

1. Do not apply the Dryvit materials in the rain. The insulation board must be dry prior to applying the 

base coat material. 

2. Prior to installing the reinforced base coat, inspect the surface of the insulation board for: 

a. Flatness: Use a minimum 2.4 m (8 ft) straight edge. Sand any high areas and out-of-plane board joints flat, 

as described in Section VIII.E.14 and 15. CAUTION: Do not build up low areas with base coat mixture 

to form a flat surface. 

b. Damage and foreign materials: correct deficiencies as necessary. 

c. Surface degradation due to weathering or UV, visible as discoloration. Sand affected areas to remove deterioration 

while maintaining the flatness of the surface. 

21


DS218 

B. Mix the base coat material as described in Section III.C and D. 

C. Prior to installing the reinforcing mesh, it should be inspected to ensure that it has been furnished by Dryvit 

Systems, Inc. 

1. Dryvit reinforcing mesh is available in the following widths and lengths: 

a. Standard - 1.2 m x 45.7 m (48 in x 150 ft); 1.8 m x 45.7 m (72 in x 150 ft) 

b. Standard Plus, and Intermediate - 1.2 m x 45.7 m (48 in x 150 ft) 

c. Panzer 15 - 1.2 m x 22.9 m (48 in x 75 ft) 

d. Panzer 20 - 1.2 m x 22.9 m (48 in x 75 ft) 

e. Corner - 235 mm x 45.7 m (9 1/4 in x 150 ft) 

f. Detail - 241 mm x 45.7 m (9 1/2 in x 150 ft) 

2. It shall be colored blue for product identification bearing the Dryvit logo. 

D. Installation of Dryflex base coat in high exposure areas such as sloped surfaces, window sills, etc. 

1. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply the Dryflex mixture on the surface of the insulation board in a uniform 

thickness of approximately 2.4 mm (3/32 in). Apply the Dryflex continuously over the sloped surface and continue 

minimum 152 mm (6 in) onto the vertical areas. 

2. Immediately place the reinforcing mesh against the wet Dryflex mixture. With the curve of the mesh against the 

wall, trowel from the center to the edges, avoiding wrinkles, until the mesh is fully covered and not visible. The 

overall minimum base coat thickness shall be sufficient to fully embed the reinforcing mesh. The 

recommended method is to apply the base coat in two (2) passes. 

NOTE: The reinforcing mesh can be continued across the transition from Dryflex base coat to standard 

base coat. 

3. Allow the Dryflex to cure a minimum of 24 hours or until dry. 

E. Base Coat Application 

1. Standard Base Coat (single layer of Standard, Standard Plus or Intermediate Reinforcing Mesh) 

a. The base coat shall be applied such that the resulting overall minimum base coat thickness is sufficient to 

fully embed the reinforcing mesh. The recommended method is to apply the base coat in two (2) passes. 

b. Double pass method (recommended) 

1) Using a stainless steel trowel, apply the base coat mixture on the entire surface of the insulation board to an 

area slightly larger than the width and length of a piece of reinforcing mesh, in a uniform thickness of 1.6 mm 

(1/16 in). NOTE: The reinforcing mesh may be installed either vertically or horizontally. 

2) Immediately place the reinforcing mesh against the wet base coat mixture. With the curve of the mesh 

against the wall, trowel from the center to the edges avoiding wrinkles, until the mesh is fully embedded 

and not visible. Trowel smooth to a uniform thickness slightly more than the thickness of the reinforcing 

mesh. NOTE: The reinforcing mesh shall be continuous at corners and mesh edges lapped not 

less than 64 mm (2 1/2 in). Do not lap the reinforcing mesh within 203 mm (8 in) of a corner. Tip: 

Corners and edges normally require light strokes with a small damp brush to smooth out 

irregularities. 

3) Allow the base coat mixture to take up until firm to the touch. Trowel a second tight coat of the base coat 

mixture over the first coat to fully cover the reinforcing mesh - Figure 20. The result should be such that 

the reinforcing mesh is approximately centered within the base coat thickness. Do not allow the first pass 

to completely dry prior to the second pass application or an excessive amount of base coat mixture will 

be necessary to fully coat the wall surface. 

Figure 20 

c. Single pass method (optional) 

1) Using a stainless steel trowel, apply the base coat mixture on the entire surface of the insulation board to an 

area slightly larger than the width and length of a piece of reinforcing mesh, in a uniform thickness of 1.6 mm 

(1/16 in). NOTE: The reinforcing mesh may be installed either vertically or horizontally. 

2) Immediately place the reinforcing mesh against the wet base coat mixture. With the curve of the mesh 

against the wall, trowel from the center to the edges avoiding wrinkles, until the mesh is fully embedded and 

not visible. Trowel smooth to a uniform thickness slightly more than the thickness of the reinforcing mesh. 

NOTE: The reinforcing mesh shall be continuous at corners and mesh edges lapped not less than 64 

mm (2 1/2 in). Do not lap the reinforcing mesh within 203 mm (8 in) of a corner. Tip: Corners and 

edges normally require light strokes with a small damp brush to smooth out irregularities. 

22


DS218 

d. Protect completed work from water penetration and runoff. 

e. Allow the base coat to cure a minimum of 24 hours before proceeding with application of finish coat. Cool, 

damp conditions may require longer drying times. Do not apply finish to a wet or damp base coat. 

2. Panzer Mesh Base Coat (Panzer 15 or Panzer 20 used in conjunction with Standard or Standard Plus 

Reinforcing Mesh). Panzer Mesh is recommended for use at all ground floor locations and at high traffic 

areas. Refer to contract documents. 

a. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply the base coat mixture on the entire surface of the insulation board to an 

area slightly larger than the width and length of a piece of reinforcing mesh, in a uniform thickness of 

approximately 3.2 mm (1/8 in). 

b. Immediately place the reinforcing mesh against the wet base coat mixture. With the curve of the mesh 

against the wall, trowel from the center to the edges avoiding wrinkles until the mesh is fully covered and not 

visible. 

c. Continue in the same manner until the entire area requiring Panzer Mesh is covered. 

CAUTION: Do not lap the Panzer Mesh. Adjacent pieces are to be tightly butted. 

d. Protect completed work from water penetration and runoff. 

e. Allow the Panzer base coat to cure a minimum of 24 hours prior to applying Dryvit's Standard or Standard 

Plus Reinforcing Mesh. 

f. Apply the second layer of reinforcing mesh in accordance with Section IX.E.1.c. Offset the edges of the 

Standard or Standard Plus Reinforcing Mesh from the edges of the Panzer Mesh a minimum of 203 mm 

(8 in). Tip: If Panzer Mesh is installed horizontally, we recommend the Standard or Standard Plus 

Mesh be installed vertically and vice versa. 

X. Sealant Joint Preparation 

A. All Outsulation Plus MD base coat surfaces which will be in contact with sealant must be coated with either Color 

Prime or Demandit. 

1. Mix Color Prime or Demandit in accordance with Section III.E and H respectively. 

2. Using a small brush, apply Color Prime or Demandit to the base coat surface that is to be in contact with the 

sealant and extending to the joint edge. 

3. Allow the Color Prime or Demandit to dry a minimum of 48 hours prior to applying the sealant primer and 

sealant. Cool damp weather may require longer drying times. 

4. Refer to sealant manufacturer’s installation instructions for the proper application of the sealant. 

XI. Dryvit Primers 

A. Prior to applying the Dryvit primers, the base coat shall have cured a minimum of 24 hours and shall be dry and 

hard. Cure time may be longer depending on environmental conditions. NOTE: Refer to Product Data Sheets 

when applying over other materials. 

B. Inspect the base coat for any irregularities such as trowel marks, board lines, rough corners and edges, improper 

reinforcing mesh embedment as well as efflorescence. NOTE: Correct all irregularities and remove all 

efflorescence prior to applying the Dryvit primer. 

C. Color Prime and Weatherprime 

1. Mix to a smooth homogeneous consistency in accordance with Section III.E. 

2. Apply with a brush, roller, or airless spray equipment. Refer to Color Prime or Weatherprime Data Sheets, 

DS410 or DS436 respectively for complete instructions. 

D. Color Prime W 


2. Application with airless spray equipment is recommended. Refer to Color Prime W Data Sheet, DS474 for 

complete instructions. 

E. Primer with Sand 


2. Application with a roller is recommended. Refer to Primer with Sand Data Sheet, DS477 for complete 

instructions. 

XII. Dryvit Finish 

A. Prior to applying the Dryvit finish, the base coat shall have cured a minimum of 24 hours and shall be dry and hard. 

Cure time may be longer depending on environmental conditions. 

B. Inspect the base coat for any irregularities such as trowel marks, board lines, rough corners and edges, improper 

reinforcing mesh embedment as well as efflorescence. NOTE: Correct all irregularities and remove all 

efflorescence prior to applying the Dryvit finish. 

23


DS218 

C. Application 

1. General 

a. Important: All Dryvit finishes must be installed continuously to a natural break such as corners, expansion 

joints, or tapeline. Mechanics must maintain a wet edge. Whenever possible, order enough material in a 

single batch to complete the project to avoid potential color variations from batch to batch. Sufficient 

personnel and scaffolding must be provided to continuously finish a distinct wall area or otherwise cold joints 

will result. Scaffolding must be spaced a minimum of 458 mm (18 in) from the wall to prevent staging lines. 

On hot windy days, the wall may be fogged with clean potable water to cool the wall and facilitate finish 

installation. As with other plaster materials, installation work should precede the sun. For example, work the 

shady or cool side of the building. If this is not possible, scaffold should be shaded with a tarp or nursery 

shade cloth. Do not introduce water to the finish material once it is installed on the wall. This will cause 

color variations. Each mechanic must use the same tool and hand motion and match the texture of the 

mechanics above, below and on each side. Use finish from a single batch number whenever possible. 

b. Do not apply Dryvit materials in the rain. The base coat must be dry prior to applying the Dryvit finish or 

coatings. 

c. Do not apply textured Dryvit finish material in sealant joints. Refer to Section X for proper sealant joint 

preparation. 

2. Quarzputz, Quarzputz E, Sandblast, Weatherlastic Quarzputz 

a. Mix the Dryvit finish as described in Section III.F. 

b. Using a clean stainless steel trowel, apply a coat of the Dryvit finish in a uniform thickness on the dry base 

coat. NOTE: The Dryvit Quarzputz finish shall be applied and leveled to a uniform thickness no 

greater than the largest aggregate. The Sandblast finish is applied and leveled to a thickness of 

approximately 1 1/2 times the largest aggregate. 

c. The texture is achieved by uniform hand motion and/or tool that produces the texture to match the approved 

sample. Each mechanic must use the same tool and hand motion to ensure that the texture achieved is 

uniform over the entire wall area. 

3. Sandpebble, Sandpebble E, Sandpebble Fine, Sandpebble Fine E, Weatherlastic Sandpebble, Weatherlastic 

Sandpebble Fine, Sandpebble FM and Sandpebble Fine FM 


b. Using a clean, stainless steel trowel, apply an even coat of the finish to a thickness slightly thicker than the 

largest aggregate size. 

c. Pull across using a horizontal trowel motion to develop a uniform thickness no greater than the largest 

aggregate of the material. 

d. The texture is achieved by a uniform hand floating motion with a clean stainless steel trowel; wipe the trowel 

and wet it lightly. Apply light pressure in a circular motion. 

4. Freestyle 


b. Using a clean, stainless steel trowel, apply the Freestyle finish on the base coat in a thickness not greater 

than 1.6 mm (1/16 in). The texture is either pulled out of this base to a thickness of no greater than 6.4 mm 

(1/4 in) or the texture may be achieved by adding more Freestyle finish to the base coat using the same 

texturing motions that are used with other plaster materials, such as, a skip trowel finish. Numerous other 

aesthetically pleasing textures can be created to match approved samples. NOTE: The maximum 

thickness of Freestyle finish texture shall not exceed 6.4 mm (1/4 in). 

5. Weatherlastic Adobe 

a. Using a brush, roller or airless spray equipment, apply a coat of color coordinated Color Prime 

(see Section III.E for mixing instructions) at the recommended coverage to the cured base coat and allow to 

dry. 

b. Mix the Weatherlastic Adobe finish material as described in Section III.F. 

c. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply a coat of Weatherlastic Adobe approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 in) to the wall 

surface. Allow the Weatherlastic Adobe finish to take-up. 

d. Using a stainless steel trowel, apply a second coat of Weatherlastic Adobe to obtain the desired texture. Tip: 

An atomizing spray bottle may be used to apply a mist of water to the surface in the finishing step. 

6. Ameristone 

a. Mix the Ameristone finish as described in Section III.G.1. 

b. Apply Ameristone finish in accordance with Ameristone Application Instructions, DS142. 

7. Stone Mist 

a. Mix the Stone Mist finish as described in Section III.G.2. 

b. Apply Stone Mist finish in accordance with Stone Mist Data Sheet, DS420. 

8. TerraNeo 

a. Mix the TerraNeo finish as described in Section III.G.3. 

b. Apply TerraNeo finish in accordance with TerraNeo Data Sheet, DS481. 

24


9. Lymestone 

a. Mix the Lymestone finish as described in Section III.G.4. 

b. Apply Lymestone finish in accordance with Lymestone Data Sheet, DS472. 

10. Custom Brick 

a. Refer to Dryvit Custom Brick Application Instructions, DS154 for complete installation instructions. 

11. Mojave E 

a. Refer to Mojave E product Data Sheet DS706. 

12. Reflectit 

a. Refer to Reflectit product Data Sheet, DS705 and Application Instructions DS124. 

DS218 

XIII. Coatings and Sealers 

A. Demandit and Weathercoat 

1. Mix to a smooth homogeneous consistency in accordance with Section III.H.1. 

2. Apply with a brush, roller, or airless spray equipment. 

3. When applying with a roller, a maximum 19 mm (3/4 in) nap, polyester or polyester blend with nylon or 

lambswool, with beveled ends and a phenolic core is recommended. A 458 mm (18 in) wide roller frame with a 

57 mm (2 1/4 in) inside diameter is also recommended. 

4. Apply in one continuous coat, maintaining a wet edge as the application proceeds to a natural break. The roller 

cover must be kept fully loaded as the application proceeds. CAUTION: Do not stretch out the application 

by rolling with a dry roller. The last leveling roller strokes should always be in the same direction. Do 

not cut in around openings prior to overall application, but rather, do the cut-in work as the application 

proceeds. 

5. Do not allow Demandit or Weathercoat to dry on roller covers. Roller covers with dried coating do not apply the 

coating evenly. 

6. Changing color requires the application of two coats. 

B. Revyvit 

1. Mix the Revyvit to a smooth homogeneous consistency in accordance with Section III.H.1. 

2. Apply the Revyvit with a brush or 12.7 mm – 15.9 mm (1/2 in - 5/8 in) nap roller. 

3. Roll or brush in multiple directions and then lightly finish in one direction to ensure that no lap marks remain. 

4. A second coat may be required for heavy textured surfaces or when there is a contrast of colors. Apply the 

second coat as described in paragraph XIII.B.2 and 3 above. CAUTION: Do not attempt to apply Revyvit in 

one heavy coat. Two coats are recommended. Apply the second coat only after the first coat is 

completely dry. Important: Texture changes will exist after Revyvit is applied over existing Dryvit 

finishes. The degree of change is a function of the thickness and the number of coats of Revyvit. 

C. Weatherlastic Smooth 

1. Mix the Weatherlastic Smooth to a smooth, homogeneous consistency in accordance with Section III.H.1. 

2. Apply a minimum 11 mils dry film thickness (22 mils wet film thickness). This is achieved by applying the 

Weatherlastic Smooth in two (2) 11 mil wet coats. Under average drying conditions, 21 °C (70 °F), 50% RH, 

two (2) hours drying time between coats should be adequate. 

3. For cutting-in and trim, a nylon bristle brush is recommended. 

4. Roller Application 

a. A minimum 254 mm (10 in) roller cover with a 32 mm - 38 mm (1 1/4 in - 1 1/2 in) nap is recommended. 

b. Completely saturate the roller cover and keep the roller loaded with coating to avoid foaming. Do not dry-roll 

or over-roll as this will cause excessive entrapment of air within the coating. 

c. A second coat is applied in a similar manner after the first coat has adequately dried. 

5. Spray Application 

a. Application by airless spray equipment or mastic pump and gun allows application of coating at total required 

application rate with a minimum of stipple or thickness variations. 

b. Equipment should have the capacity to pump 7.6 L (2 gal) of coating per minute. 

c. Material hose should be minimum 12.7 mm (1/2 in) inside diameter for spraying coating through more than a 

15 m (50 ft) length. Minimum bursting of 3600 N (800 lbs) is recommended. Tip: Orifice sizes of 0.53 mm 

- 0.81 mm (0.021 in - 0.032 in) will be required depending on equipment used. 

d. Cross apply coating holding spray gun perpendicular to, and approximately 1 m (3 ft) from the wall surface. 

Avoid excessive material build-up by holding spray gun away from the wall when pulling the trigger, then 

bringing gun across area to be coated. Maintain a wet edge and avoid starting and stopping in the middle of 

the wall. Do not attempt to overreach spray pattern as this may result in appearance of irregular spray 

pattern. Place scaffolding and equipment to facilitate quick application without numerous interruptions. 

e. A 10 % loss from overspray should be anticipated. 

f. Backrolling sprayed areas is recommended to control pinholing on spray applications over porous surfaces. 

25


DS218 

D. Tuscan Glaze 

1. Mix Tuscan Glaze to a smooth homogenous consistency in accordance with Section III.H.2. Continuously 

agitate throughout application to ensure color consistency. 

2. Tuscan Glaze is best applied on large areas using a Hudson-type sprayer or airless spray equipment. For 

smaller areas, Tuscan Glaze is best applied with a paint pad or, depending on the desired results, a roller, paint 

brush or sponge. Job site mock-ups are required and should represent the actual job site application 

techniques. 

3. Apply Tuscan Glaze evenly in light strokes. If sagging or running occurs, use a sponge or paint pad to correct 

immediately. Watch for brush or roller lines. If brush or roller lines appear, use a damp sponge, a paint pad or 

rag to make them disappear before the Tuscan Glaze starts to dry. The wall may be blotted with a camelback 

sponge to achieve the desired mottled appearance. Check walls throughout the application to insure that 

uniformity and the desired appearance is achieved. 

E. SealClear 

1. Mix SealClear to a smooth, homogeneous consistency in accordance with Section III.H.3. 

2. For application instructions, refer to the SealClear Data Sheet, DS426. 

XIV. Maintenance and Repair 

A. Refer to DryvitCARE EIFS Repair Procedures, DS498. 

DISCLAIMER 

Information contained in this specification conforms to standard detail and product recommendations for the 

installation of the Dryvit Outsulation Plus MD System products as of the date of publication of this document and 

is presented in good faith. Dryvit Systems, Inc. assumes no liability, expressed or implied, as to the 

architecture, engineering or workmanship of any project. To insure that you are using the latest, most complete 

information, contact Dryvit Systems, Inc., at: 



(401) 822-4100 




(800) 556-7752 


For more information on Dryvit Systems or Continuous Insulation, 

visit these links. 

Printed in USA R21:05-03-13 

©Dryvit Systems, Inc. 1998 26

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

DETAIL 

OUTSULATION PLUS MD SYSTEM 

GRADE TERMINATION WITH 

DRAINAGE STRIP 

GRADE TERMINATION WITH 

DRAINAGE TRACK 

GRADE LEVEL TERMINATION 

AT CONCRETE CURB 

OPENING PREPARATION- 

AQUAFLASH® SYSTEM OPTION 

OPENING PREPARATION- 

BACKSTOP® NT OPTION 

OPENING FLASHING INTEGRATION 

HEAD/SILL- 

STOREFRONT WINDOW 

HEAD/SILL- 

SELF FLASHING WINDOW 

HEAD J-TRACK OPTION 

JAMB 

TERMINATION AT PARAPET- 

CAP FLASHING 

TERMINATION AT 

PARAPET/WALL INTERSECTION 

TERMINATION AT PARAPET- 

SOLID SUBSTRATE 

TERMINATION AT 

SOFFIT/FASCIA INTERSECTION 

TERMINATION AT SOFFIT- 

UNINSULATED 

INSIDE/OUTSIDE CORNERS 

OUTSIDE CORNER - HIGH IMPACT 

HORIZONTAL JOINT- 

SUBSTRATE CHANGE 

HORIZONTAL SLIP JOINT 

HORIZONTAL SLIP JOINT WITH DRAINAGE 

VERTICAL EXPANSION JOINT OPTIONS 

STRUCTURAL EXPANSION JOINTS 

PENETRATIONS 

EPS PREPARATION AT 

WALL PENETRATIONS 

OPMD 0.0.01 

OPMD 0.0.02 

OPMD 0.0.03 

OPMD 0.0.04 

OPMD 0.0.05 

OPMD 0.0.06 

OPMD 0.0.07 

OPMD 0.0.08 

OPMD 0.0.09 

OPMD 0.0.10 

OPMD 0.0.11 

OPMD 0.0.12 

OPMD 0.0.13 

OPMD 0.0.14 

OPMD 0.0.15 

OPMD 0.0.16 

OPMD 0.0.17 

OPMD 0.0.18 

OPMD 0.0.19 

OPMD 0.0.20 

OPMD 0.0.21 

OPMD 0.0.22 

OPMD 0.0.23 

OPMD 0.0.24 

OPMD 0.0.25 

NOTE 

DETAIL 

SIGN ATTACHMENT 

OPMD 0.0.26 

AESTHETIC REVEALS 

OPMD 0.0.27 

PROJECTING GRAPHICS 

OPMD 0.0.28 

RECESSED GRAPHICS 

OPMD 0.0.29 

HORIZONTAL JOINT AT STONE VENEER OPMD 0.0.30 

HORIZONTAL JOINT AT STUCCO 

OPMD 0.0.31 

HORIZONTAL JOINT AT WOOD SIDING OPMD 0.0.32 

VERTICAL TERMINATION AT STONE VENEER OPMD 0.0.33 

SOFFIT VENT 

OPMD 0.0.34 

DRYVIT MAKES NO REPRESENTATION REGARDING 

CONFORMITY OF ITS SUGGESTIONS TO MODEL 

BUILDING CODES, ENGINEERING CRITERIA, SPECIFIC 

APPLICATIONS OR PROJECT LOCATIONS. ALL COMPONENTS 

INDICATED IN ILLUSTRATIONS, AS WELL AS OTHERS THAT MAY 

BE REQUIRED FOR THE INTEGRITY OF THE SYSTEM SHALL BE 

DESIGNED, DETAILED AND ENGINEERED BY REPRESENTATIVES 

OF THE ARCHITECT, OWNER OR CONTRACTOR TO BE IN 

CONFORMANCE WITH MODEL CODES, ARCHITECTURAL 

AND ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS PERTAINING TO SPECIFIC 

BUILDING PROJECTS. 

DRYVIT MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESSED 

OR IMPLIED, AS TO THE ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, 

ENGINEERING, OR WORKMANSHIP OF PROJECTS UTILIZING 

DRYVIT SYSTEMS OR PRODUCTS. 

THE LIABILITIES OF DRYVIT SHALL BE AS STATED 

IN THE OUTSULATION PLUS MD LIMITED COMMERCIAL 

WARRANTY. CONTACT DRYVIT FOR A FULL AND 

COMPLETE COPY OF THE WARRANTY. 

Outsulation®Plus MD System® 

The architecture, engineering and design of the project using the 

Dryvit products is the responsibility of the project's design 

professional. All systems must comply with local building codes and 

standards. This detail is for general information and guidance only 

and Dryvit specifically disclaims any liability for the use of this 

detail and for the architecture, design, engineering or workmanship o 

any project. The project design professional determines, in its sole 

discretion, whether this detail or a functionally equivalent alternative 

is best suited for the project. Use of a functionally equivalent detail 

does not violate Dryvit's warranty. This detail is subject to change 

without notice. Contact Dryvit to insure you have the most recent 

version. 

® 

© 1998 Dryvit 

APPROVED BY: 

RS 

REV: 

DATE: 

14 02/12

OPMD 0.0.12 

METAL CAP FLASHING, BY OTHERS 

DRYVIT AQUAFLASH® SYSTEM 

(SEE NOTE 2) 

64 MM (2-1/2") MIN. 

DRYVIT COMPATIBLE SEALANT 

WITH BOND BREAKER, BY OTHERS 

ROOF ASSEMBLY 

DRYVIT DETAIL MESH® WRAPPED 

TO BACKSIDE OF EPS MIN. 51 MM (2") 

APPROVED SUBSTRATE, 

BY OTHERS 

DRYVIT WATER-RESISTIVE 

BARRIER COATING 

DRYVIT ADHESIVE IN VERTICAL 

NOTCHED TROWEL CONFIGURATION 

EPS INSULATION 

DRYVIT REINFORCING MESH 

EMBEDDED IN BASE COAT 

DRYVIT FINISH 

FRAMING, BY OTHERS 

BY OTHERS 

DRYVIT OUTSULATION PLUS MD SYSTEM 

Outsulation®Plus MD System® 

NOTE: 

1. DRYVIT RECOMMENDS THAT GROUND FLOOR 2. DRYVIT FLASHING TAPE SURFACE 

APPLICATIONS AND ALL FACADES EXPOSED CONDITIONER AND DRYVIT FLASHING 

TO ABNORMAL STRESS, HIGH TRAFFIC, OR TAPE MAY BE USED LIEU OF DRYVIT 

DELIBERATE IMPACT HAVE THE BASE COAT AQUAFLASH SYSTEM. 

REINFORCED WITH PANZER® MESH PRIOR TO 

STANDARD OR STANDARD PLUS MESH. 

LOCATION OF HIGH IMPACT ZONES SHOULD BE 

INDICATED ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS. 

Termination At Parapet - Cap Flashing 

The architecture, engineering and design of the project using the 

Dryvit products is the responsibility of the project's design 

professional. All systems must comply with local building codes and 

standards. This detail is for general information and guidance only 

and Dryvit specifically disclaims any liability for the use of this 

detail and for the architecture, design, engineering or workmanship o 

any project. The project design professional determines, in its sole 

discretion, whether this detail or a functionally equivalent alternative 

is best suited for the project. Use of a functionally equivalent detail 

does not violate Dryvit's warranty. This detail is subject to change 

without notice. Contact Dryvit to insure you have the most recent 

version. 

® 

© 1998 Dryvit 

APPROVED BY: 

RS 

REV: 

10 

DATE: 

02/12

Solicitation Document - Invitation for Bid No. 2014-002 - City of ...

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?